Menu

Romans 5:14 — Word Study

Depth

N1904ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

BSANeverthelessalla reignedbasileuō [exercised dominion, held power] <the>ho deaththanatos [physical and spiritual separation from God] fromapo AdamAdam [the first man] untilmechri MosesMōusēs, Mōsēs evenkai overepi thoseho not having sinnedhamartanō [miss the mark, fall short] inepi theho likenesshomoiōma of theho transgressionparabasis [disobeyed, rebelled against God's will] of AdamAdam whohos, hē iseimi a typetupos [a figure, a model] of theho coming [One].mellō [the future Messiah, Jesus Christ]

Word
Listen & take awayRomans 5
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 14 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (mellō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Romans 5:14quick helps
In a sentencePaul explains that death has ruled since Adam, even affecting those who did not sin like him, and Adam serves as a model for the coming One.
Who is speakingThe Apostle Paul, addressing the Roman believers.
Where we areThis verse is part of a larger discussion on sin and grace, contrasting Adam's transgression with the gift of Christ.
The hard wordτύπος
Take awayDeath's reign began with Adam and continues, but it points to the hope found in Christ.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbβασιλεύω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Romans 5:14

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Contrast Between Adam and Christgenerated

13For sin was in the world before the law was given; but sin is not taken into account when there is no law.
14Nevertheless, death reigned from Adam until Moses, even over those who did not sin in the way that Adam transgressed. He is a pattern of the One to come.
15But the gift is not like the trespass. For if the many died by the trespass of the one man, how much more did God’s grace and the gift that came by the grace of the one man, Jesus Christ, abound to the many!
16Again, the gift is not like the result of the one man’s sin: The judgment that followed one sin brought condemnation, but the gift that followed many trespasses brought justification.

Romans 5:14 discusses the reign of death from Adam to Moses, emphasizing that even those who did not sin like Adam were still affected by death. Paul contrasts this with the gift of grace through Jesus Christ, highlighting the significance of Adam's role as a precursor to Christ. This passage is crucial for understanding the theological implications of sin and redemption in Christian doctrine.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Romans 5:17–21For if, by the trespass of the one man, death reigned through that one man, how much more will those who receive an abundance of grace and of the gift of righteousness reign in life through the one man, Jesus Christ!
2Genesis 4:8Then Cain said to his brother Abel, “Let us go out to the field.” And while they were in the field, Cain rose up against his brother Abel and killed him.
3Genesis 5:5–31So Adam lived a total of 930 years, and then he died.
4Genesis 7:22Of all that was on dry land, everything that had the breath of life in its nostrils died.
5Genesis 19:25Thus He destroyed these cities and the entire plain, including all the inhabitants of the cities and everything that grew on the ground.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 11 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word τύπος, tuposgenerated

The word τύπος (tupos) refers to a type or model, derived from the verb τύπτω. It indicates a mark or impression, often used to signify a foreshadowing of future events or persons, as seen in Romans 5:14.

In this context, Adam is described as a type of the One to come, which is a reference to Christ. This establishes a theological link between Adam's transgression and the redemptive work of Jesus, showing how one man's actions have implications for all humanity.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is presented in the Berean Standard Bible, which uses the term pattern to describe Adam's role. This is consistent with the BSB, ASV, and KJV, which also emphasize the typological relationship.

However, translations differ on the rendering of τύπος. The YLT uses type, while the WEB refers to Adam as a foreshadowing, illustrating the varying interpretations of this concept.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is ἐβασίλευσεν, reigned, which governs the entire sentence. The structure includes a subject phrase, prepositional phrases indicating time and conditions, and a participial phrase describing Adam's role.

The sentence is complex, with multiple clauses that elaborate on the reign of death and Adam's significance, showing the layered relationship between sin, death, and the coming of Christ.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

Ἀδὰμ is a direct reference to the Hebrew אָדָם (Adam), which appears in the Septuagint. This connection emphasizes the continuity of the narrative from the Old Testament to the New Testament, where Adam is a pivotal figure.

θάνατος in the Septuagint corresponds to the Hebrew (to die), linking the concept of death in both Testaments and reinforcing the theological themes of sin and mortality.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Romans 5:14 tells us that death has ruled from Adam to Moses, affecting even those who did not sin like Adam. Adam serves as a model for the One to come, which refers to Jesus Christ. This verse highlights the impact of sin on humanity and sets the stage for understanding salvation through Christ.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that death reigned from Adam until Moses?

This indicates that the consequence of sin, which is death, has been in effect since Adam's transgression and continued until the law was given to Moses.

How is Adam a pattern of the One to come?

Adam's actions brought sin and death into the world, while Christ, referred to as the One to come, brings salvation and life, establishing a contrast between the two.

What does the term 'transgression' mean in this context?

Transgression refers to Adam's disobedience to God's command, which resulted in sin entering the world and affecting all humanity.

Why does Paul mention those who did not sin like Adam?

Paul emphasizes that even those who did not directly disobey God, like Adam, were still under the reign of death, illustrating the pervasive nature of sin.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways do I see the effects of sin in the world around me?
  2. How can I better understand the grace that comes through Jesus in contrast to the death that came through Adam?
  3. What does it mean for me to live in light of the hope that Christ brings?
  4. How can I share the message of redemption found in Jesus with others?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church writers reference this verse to discuss the implications of Adam's sin and its relation to Christ's redemptive work.

Hippolytus of RomeHippolytus Refutation of All Heresies Book VII c. 170–235
When, therefore, according to these (heretics), the entire world and super-mundane entities were finished, and (when) nothing exists labouring under deficiency, there still remains in the (conglomeration of) all germs the third Sonship,
Early Church Fathers on Romans 5 →
Origen of AlexandriaCOMMENTARY ON THE EPISTLE TO THE ROMANS c. 185–253
It seems to me that Paul’s description of death and its power may be compared to the entry of a tyrant who wants to usurp the authority of the legitimate ruler and after seizing the entrance to the kingdom by the treachery of the…
Early Church Fathers on Romans 5 →
Methodius of Olympus d. c. 311
But the females to be preserved alive. For the devil, ruling
Early Church Fathers on Romans 5 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Romans 5:14 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Nevertheless death reigned from Adam to Moses,.... Though the law of Moses was not yet given, death exerted itself, and extended its dominion over all the sons and daughters of Adam, during the

Read John Gill on Romans 5 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Nevertheless death reigned from Adam to Moses, even over them that had not sinned after the similitude of Adam's transgression, who is the figure of him that was to come.

Read Robert Jamieson on Romans 5 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

He proceeds to prove his assertion in the foregoing verse, that sin was in the world before the law, because death, which is the wages of sin, did reign, and had power over all mankind, from Adam to Moses, which was about two thousand five hundred years. Even over them that had not sinned after the similitude of Adam’ s transgression; i.e. over very infants, that had not actually sinned as Adam did. But though infants did not sin like Adam, yet they sinned in Adam; the guilt of his sin was imputed to them, else death could have had no power over them. Infants (as one saith) are not altogether innocents; the very first sheet or blanket wherewith they are covered is woven of sin and shame, of…

Read Matthew Poole on Romans 5 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

14 Nevertheless death reigned from Adam to Moses, even over them that had not sinned after the similitude of Adam’ s transgression, who is the figure of him that was to come. Ver. 14. Death reigned] From the reign of death, he concludes the reign of sin. Infants are no innocents; the first sheet or blanket wherein they are covered is woven of sin, shame, blood, and filth, Ezekiel 16:4-6.

Read John Trapp on Romans 5 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(14) After the similitude of Adam’s transgression—i.e., “in direct defiance of divine command.” They had not incurred just punishment as Adam had, and yet they died. Why? Because of Adam’s sin, the effects of which extended to them all, just in the same way as the effects of the death of Christ extend to all. Who is the figure.—Better, type. There is thus hinted at the parallelism which was omitted in Romans 5:12. Adam was the type of Christ, his sin and its effects the type of Christ’s death and its effects. No doubt the way in which this point is introduced is, in a mere rhetorical sense, faulty. St. Paul was, however, much above caring for rhetoric. And beside, it must be remembered that…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Romans 5 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 14. Nevertheless, death reigned from Adam to Moses] This supposes, as Dr. Taylor very properly observes:- 1. That sin was in the world from Adam to Moses. 2. That law was not in the world from Adam to Moses during the space of about 2500 years; for, after Adam's transgression, that law was abrogated; and, from that time, men were either under the general covenant of grace given to Adam or Noah, or under that which was specially made with Abraham. 3. That, therefore, the sins committed were not imputed unto them to death, for they did not sin after the similitude of Adam's transgression; that is, they did not, like him, transgress a law, or rule of action, to which death, as the…

Read AdamClarke on Romans 5 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

14. reigned] See below, on Romans 5:21. The idea is of unquestioned dominion.after the similitude, &c.] i.e. by conscious transgression of express precepts. The phrase thus exactly meets the case of infant-death, and also includes all other cases, supposed possible, in which no distinct violation of then-known law was traceable.the figure] Lit. a figure. The word “type,” (derived from the Gr. word used here,) expresses the meaning exactly. Adam so sinned that his sons, even irrespective of personal sins, died—a penal death. Christ, the last Adam, so lived and suffered that his “brethren,” irrespective of personal merit, live, with the life of the justified.him that was to come] Christ…

Read Cambridge on Romans 5 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Nevertheless - Notwithstanding that sin is not imputed where there is no law, yet death reigned. Death reigned - People died; they were under the dominion of death in its various melancholy influences.

Read Albert Barnes on Romans 5 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Nevertheless, death reigned from Adam until Moses, even over those who did not sin in the way that Adam transgressed. He is a pattern of the One to come.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Nevertheless death reigned from Adam until Moses, even over those whose sins weren’t like Adam’s disobedience, who is a foreshadowing of him who was to come.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Nevertheless, death reigned from Adam until Moses, even over those who did not sin in the way that Adam transgressed. He is a pattern of the One to come.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Yet death reigned from Adam until Moses even over those who did not sin in the same way that Adam (who is a type of the coming one) transgressed.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Nevertheless death reigned from Adam to Moses, even over them that had not sinned after the similitude of Adam’s transgression, who is the figure of him that was to come.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

Nevertheless death reigned from Adam until Moses, even over them that had not sinned after the likeness of Adam’s transgression, who is a figure of him that was to come.

RVARevised Version, American1894

Nevertheless death reigned from Adam until Moses, even over them that had not sinned after the likeness of Adam’s transgression, who is a figure of him that was to come.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Nevertheless, death reigned from Adam to Moses, even over them that had not sinned after the similitude of Adam's transgression, who is the figure of him that was to come.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

But death reigned from Adam to Moses, euen ouer them also that sinned not after the like maner of that transgression of Adam, which was the figure of him that was to come.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

but death reigned from Adam until Moses, even upon those who had not sinned in the likeness of Adam's transgression, who is [the] figure of him to come.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

but the death did reign from Adam till Moses, even upon those not having sinned in the likeness of Adam's transgression, who is a type of him who is coming.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

but death reigned from Adam until Moses, even on those having not sinned in the likeness of Adam’s transgression, who is a type of Him who is coming.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Nevertheless, death ruled from Adam until Moses, even over those who did not sin like Adam's disobedience, who is a pattern of him who was to come.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

But death reigned from Adam unto Moses, even over them also who have not sinned after the similitude of the transgression of Adam, who is a figure of him who was to come.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

But death still ruled from Adam until Moses, even over those who didn't sin in the same way as Adam did. Now Adam prefigured the one to come.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

But still death had power from Adam till Moses, even over those who had not done wrong like Adam, who is a picture of him who was to come.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἐβασίλευσενbasileuō reigned G936 2 different renderings
reignedASV BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA WEB
reignYLT
μέχριmechri until G3360 2 different renderings
untilASV BSB DBY FBV LSV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB
untoDRA
ἁμαρτήσανταςhamartanō having sinned G264 3 different renderings
sinnedASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA
having sinnedYLT
sinsWEB
ἈδὰμAdam of Adam G76 2 different renderings
adamBBE BSB DBY FBV MSB NETB NWB ULB WEB YLT
of adamASV DRA GNV KJV LSV RVA
ἐστινeimi is G1510 2 different renderings
wasASV BBE DRA GNV KJV NWB RVA ULB WEB
he isBSB MSB
τύποςtupos a type G5179 3 different renderings
a figureASV DRA RVA
a typeLSV NETB YLT
patternBSB MSB ULB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseἀλλὰNeverthelessclauseverbἐβασίλευσενreignednoun phrase · subject-θάνατοςdeathprepositional phrase · adverbialprepositional phraseἀπὸfromἈδὰμAdamprepositional phraseμέχριuntilΜωϋσέωςMosesprepositional phrase · adverbialκαὶevenprepositional phraseἐπὶovernoun phraseτοὺςthoseclauseadverbialμὴnotverbἁμαρτήσανταςhaving sinnedprepositional phrase · adverbialἐπὶinnoun phraseτῷthenoun phraseὁμοιώματιlikenessnoun phraseτῆςof thenoun phraseπαραβάσεωςtransgressionnoun phraseἈδάμof Adamclausesubjectὅςwholinking verbἐστινisnoun phrase · predicateτύποςa typenoun phraseτοῦof theclauseverbμέλλοντοςcoming [One]

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Sed regnavit mors ab Adam usque ad Moysen etiam in eos qui non peccaverunt in similitudinem prævaricationis Adæ, qui est forma futuri.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܐܠܐ ܐܡܠܟ ܡܘܬܐ ܡܢ ܐܕܡ ܘܥܕܡܐ ܠܡܘܫܐ ܐܦ ܥܠ ܐܝܠܝܢ ܕܠܐ ܚܛܘ ܒܕܡܘܬܐ ܕܥܒܪ ܢܡܘܣܗ ܕܐܕܡ ܗܘ ܕܐܝܬܘܗܝ ܕܡܘܬܐ ܕܗܘ ܕܥܬܝܕ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

ἀλλ᾽ ἐβασίλευσεν θάνατος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μέχρι Μωϋσέως καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς μὴ ἁμαρτήσαντας ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως Ἀδὰμ ὅς ἐστιν τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Romans 5:14ἀλλάNeverthelesNeverthelessἀλλάβασιλεύωreignedreignedβασιλεύω<the><the>θάνατοςdeathdeathθάνατοςἀπόfromfromἀπόἈδάμAdamAdamἈδάμμέχριuntiluntilμέχριΜωϋσῆςMosesMosesΜωϋσῆςκαίevenevenκαίἐπίoveroverἐπίthosethoseμήnotnotμήἁμαρτάνωhaving sinnhaving sinnedἁμαρτάνωἐπίininἐπίthetheὁμοίωμαlikenesslikenessὁμοίωμαof theof theπαράβασιςtransgressitransgressionπαράβασιςἈδάμof Adamof AdamἈδάμὅςwhowhoὅςεἰμίisisεἰμίτύποςa typea typeτύποςof theof theμέλλωcoming [Onecoming [One].μέλλωβασιλεύςn.m. a kinn.m. a king, ruβασιλεύςθνῄσκωv. I am dyv. I am dying, θνῄσκωμῆκοςn.n. lengtn.n. lengthμῆκοςἄλφαletter theletter the firsἄλφαὁμοιόωv. I make v. I make like,ὁμοιόωπαραβαίνωv. I transv. I transgressπαραβαίνωτύπτωv. I beat,v. I beat, striτύπτωἄλλοςAdj other,Adj other, anotἄλλοςοὐNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. no, noοὐArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗμέλειv. it is av. it is a careμέλειπρῶτοςAdj first,Adj first, befoπρῶτοςζάωv. I livev. I liveζάωκάθημαιv. I sit, v. I sit, am seκάθημαιθρόνοςn.m. a thrn.m. a throne, θρόνοςγίνομαιv. I come v. I come into γίνομαιμόνοςAdv alone,Adv alone, but,μόνος
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Romans 5:14

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἀλλ᾽alla Nevertheless G235 Conjunction
638× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
But is a strong opposing word, used in Matthew 5:15 and John 7:16. It shows contrast or surprise, like in the phrase 'but God' in Romans 3:31.
Tyndale gloss
but
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀλλά (alla) is an adversative particle, meaning 'but' or 'otherwise.' It is derived from the neuter plural of ἄλλος and is used to introduce opposition or contrast in sentences. In the New Testament, it often appears in contexts that involve negation or exceptions, such as in Matthew 5:15 and John 16:2. The lexicons note its stronger adversative force compared to δέ.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀλλά (ἀλλ’ usually bef. α and υ, often bef. ε and η, rarely bef. ο and ω, never bef. ι; Tdf., Pr., 93 f.; WH, App., 146),

adversative particle,

stronger than δέ; prop. neuter pl. of ἄλλος, used adverbially, with changed accent; hence prop. otherwise, on the other hand (cf. Ro 3:31);

opposing a previous negation, but: οὐ (μὴ) . . . ἀ., Mt 5:15, 17 Mk 5:39, Jo 7:16, al.; rhetorically subordinating but not entirely negativing what precedes, οὐ . . . ἀ., not so much . . . as, Mk 9:37, Mt 10:20, Jo 12:44, al.; with ellipse of the negation, Mt 11:7-9

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀλλά, an adversative particle, derived from ἄλλα, neut. of the adj. ἄλλος, which was originally pronounced ἀλλός (cf. Klotz ad Dévar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, other things se. than those just mentioned. It differs from δέ, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [ef. W. 441 sq. (411)]. 1. But. So related to the preceding words that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to concessions; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii. 48; Ro. v. 14 sq.; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; Phil. ii. 27 (ἀλλ᾽ ὁ θεός etc.), ete. 2. an objection: Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7; xe 29: 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk. xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp. with καί added, Lk. xii. 7…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀλλά. The closeness οἱ ἀλλά to πλήν appears in more uses than one. Armitage Robinson, Zp/estans, p. 205, has a note on a quasi-resumpltive use of ἀλλά in Eph 524 which is closely paralleled by that of πλήν in ver. 33. Then there are instances of ἀλλά = ‘‘except.” ‘This is clear where we have ἀλλ᾽ ἤ (as in 2 Cor 13%): thus P Petr 11. 9 (3)® (B.c. 24139) ὥστε μηθένα εἶναι ἐνταῦθα ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἡμᾶς, ‘ There is no one left here except ourselves” (Ed.), 2d. 46 (α)" (B.C. 209) καὶ μὴ ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς ἄλλο μηδὲν add’ ἢ τὴν mpoyeypap[μέν]ην ἐγγύην, “has not been pledged for any other purpose than the aforesaid security” (1α.), P Lond 89738 (a.p. 84) (=TIII. p. 207) ὃ μέντοιγε οὐ θέλων. ἀλλὰ ἢ ἀνάγκηι. In P Tebt I. το 419 (B.c. 92) μὴ ἐξέστω Φιλίσκωι γυναῖκα ἄλλην. μ γυ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀλλά (alla) — but.

ἀλλά,

conjunction, originally neuter plural of ἄλλος, otheruise: used adversatively to limit or oppose words, sentences, or clauses, stronger than δέ:

I. in simple oppositions, but,

I.1. after negative clauses, οὐ κακός, ἀλλ᾽ ἀγαθός[Refs 8th c.BC+]

I.1. b after a simple negative, ἦ παραφρονεῖ; οὔκ, ἀλλ᾽ ὕπνος μ᾽ ἔχει[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.1. c frequently after οὐ μόνον, μὴ μόνον, with or without καί, οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀ. πολλάκις[Refs 5th c.BC+], either, not only.. but.., μὴ ὅτι ἰδιώτην τινά, ἀλλὰ τὸν μέγαν βασιλέα[Refs 5th c.BC+]; or, not only not.. but.., οὐχ ὅπως κωλυταὶ.. γενήσεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ.. περιόψεσθε[Refs 5th c.BC+]; the negative form is ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ, μὴ ὅτι ὑπὲρ ἄλλου, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ὑπὲρ ἐμαυτοῦ δίκην εἴρηκα[Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀλλά

alla

neuter plural of 243; properly, other things, i.e. (adverbially)

contrariwise (in many relations):--and, but (even), howbeit, indeed,

nay, nevertheless, no, notwithstanding, save, therefore, yea, yet.

see GREEK for 243

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀλλά

Cj.

but, except

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀλλά alla 638x

but; however; but still more; ἀλλάγε, at all events; ἀλλή, unless, except. Ἀλλά also serves to introduce a sentence with keenness and emphasis, Jn. 16:2; Rom. 6:5; 7:7; Phil. 3:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀλλά Conjunct., properly neut. pl. of ἄλλος (with changed accent) otherwise, but, stronger than δέ:

to oppose single clauses, but, Lat. autem, the preceding clause being negat., οὐ μόνον ἅπαξ, ἀλλὰ πολλάκις Plat.; so, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅτι, οὐχ (or μὴ) ὅπως, are followed by ἀλλά or ἀλλά καὶ . . . , not only . . . , but . . .

after a negative ἀλλά sometimes = ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, except, but, ἔπαισεν οὔτις ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ Soph.

to oppose whole sentences, but, yet, Lat. at:— used by Hom., with imperat. or subj., to remonstrate, encourage, persuade, like Lat. tandem, ἀλλ᾽ ἴθι, ἀλλ᾽ ἄγε, ἀλλὰ ἴωμεν, Hom.

joined with other Particles, ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα, or, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, but then, however, Hdt., etc.

ἀλλὰ γάρ, Lat. enimvero, but really, certainly, attic

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
92%but
but92% · 591×instead2% · 15×other renderings4% · 25×other renderings2% · 12×

643 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial10%object6%predicate3%subject2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 638 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
οἶδαI know, rememberκατεργάζομαιI work out, prodἐπιγινώσκωI come to know,
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγράφωI writeἐν
ἐγώ
ἀπόκρατέωI lay hold of, oθέλημαwill, wish, desi
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegοὐδείςno one, none, noΜωϋσῆςMoses
θεόςGod, a god
Article theἄνομοςlawless, sinful,
ἀλλάNevertheless638×
what comes after →
Article the
Article theπέμπωI sendθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ἐν
οὐNeg
πᾶςall, the whole, ἐνδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ἐν
πᾶςall, the whole, Article theδύναμιςmight, power, ma
ἵναin order that, so th
φανερόωI make clear, viπληρόωI fill, fulfill,σῴζωI save, heal

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀλλά · 638× in the New Testament
John 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Mark Matthew Luke Acts Galatians 1 Peter Hebrews Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.1c. AD 75–95

Τοῖς τὰς ἱστορίας συγγράφειν βουλομένοις οὐ μίαν οὐδὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ὁρῶ τῆς σπουδῆς γινομένην αἰτίαν, ἀλλὰ πολλὰς καὶ πλεῖστον ἀλλήλων διαφερούσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτους ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος, ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 44Pathyris127 BC

ἐπὶ Διονυσίου ἀγορανόμου ἐν τῶι ϛ ἔτει ἐπὶ τοῦ Φιλομήτορος ἣ διασαφεῖ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ ἐπίτροπον Ἑρμ … φιλον ὄντα συγγενῆ κατέστησεν καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων δ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα … θαι ἀλλʼ ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἐβασίλευσενbasileuō reigned G936 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
21× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To reign means to rule or have authority, as seen in 1 Timothy 6:15. It can be used for human kings, God, or Jesus Christ, emphasizing their power and dominion.
Amplified meaning
exercised dominion, held power
Tyndale gloss
to reign
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word βασιλεύω (i.e., *basileuō*) means to reign or rule, derived from βασιλεύς (king). It covers a range of meanings from literal kingship to metaphorical reign, including God's sovereignty and the future reign of Christians. The New Testament references include Matthew 2:22 and Revelation 5:10. Notably, the lexicons mention its use in both a literal and figurative sense, with some discussing its ingressive aorist form.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βασιλεύω,

(< βασιλεύς),

[in LXX for מלךְ, its parts and derivatives, exc. IV Ki 15:5 (ישׁב);]

to be king, to reign, rule: I Ti 6:15; c. gen. (cl.), Mt 2:22; seq. ἐπί, c. acc. (= Heb. מלךְ על; Bl., § 36, 8), Lk 1:33 19:14, 27, Ro 5:14; ἐπὶ τ. γῆς, on earth, Re 5:10; of God, Re 11:15, 17 19:6; of Christ, Lk 1:33, I Co 15:25, Re 11:15; of Christians, Re 5:10 20:4 (constative aor., M, Pr.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βασιλεύω ; fut. βασιλεύσω ; 1 aor. ἐβασίλευσα; (βασιλεύς) ; —in Grk. writ. [fr. Hom. down] with gen. or dat., in the sacred writ., after the Hebr. (Sy win), foll. by emi with gen. of place, Mt. ii. 22 (where LT WH om. ‘irbr. ἐπί) ; Rev. v.10; foll. by ἐπί with acc. of the pers., Lk. i. 33; xix. 14,27; Ro. v.14; [ef. W. 206 (193 sq.); B. 169 (147) ]—to be king, to exercise kingly power, «9 reign: univ., 1 Tim. vi. 15; Lk. xix. 14,27; of the governor of a country, although not possessing kingly Bacrato rank, Mt. ii. 22; of God, Rev. xi. 15, 17; xix. 6; of the rule of Jesus, the Messiah, Lk. i. 33; 1 Co. xv. 25; Rev. xi. 15; of the reign of Christians in the millennium, Rey. v. 10; xx. 4, 6; xxii. 5; hence Paul transfers the word to denote the supreme moral dignity, liberty, blessedness, which will be enjoyed by Christ’s redeemed ones: Ro. v. 17 (ef. De Wette and Thol. ad loc.) ; 1 Co. iv.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βασιλεύω. A good example of the ingressive aorist is afforded by the new Agraphon as restored by the editors—P Oxy IV. 654° θαμ]βηθεὶς βασιλεύσει καῇ βασιλεύσας ἀναπα]ήσεται, ““ astonished he shall reach the Kingdom, and having reached the Kingdom he shall rest”: see /0/eg. p. 130. The verb is used to render the Persian title (see under βασιλεύς) in P Sa‘id Khan 1 (a)! (B.c. 88) βασιλεύοντος βασιλέων Ἀρσάκου : 1 (4)! and 2! (B.c. 22-1) have the same formula. CPHerm 1254.% (a.p. 260-8) διατρίβοντός colv] ἐπὶ τῆς βασιλευούσης Ῥώμης supplies an illustration for Rev 187, For the relation of the Pauline conception of ‘‘ the saint as king” (Rom 517, 2 Tim 215) to the Greek philosophic ideal, see Ramsay 7eaching, p. 157 ff.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βασιλεύω (basileuō) — to reign.

βᾰσῐλ-εύω,

to be king, rule, reign, οὐ μέν πως πάντες βασιλεύσομεν ἐνθάδ᾽ Ἀχαιοί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν ὑμῖν.. βασίλευε was king among you, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also of a woman, ἢ βασίλευεν ὑπὸ Πλάκῳ reigned as queen, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in aorist, to have become king, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with genitive, to be king of, rule over, ἐν.. Ἰθάκῃ βασιλεύσει Ἀχαιῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with dative, to be king among, Γιγάντεσσιν βασίλευεν [LXX+8th c.BC+]:—passive, to be governed by a king, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: generally, to be governed or administered, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: hence, submit to the king, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

__b to be ἄρχων β. at Athens, [Refs 5th c.BC+] of other magistrates, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

βασιλεύω

basileuo

from 935; to rule (literally or figuratively):--king, reign.

see GREEK for 935

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βασιλεύω

v.

I rule, reign, reign over

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βασιλεύω basileuō 21x

to possess regal authority, be a king, reign; to rule, govern, Mt. 2:22; met. to be in force, predominate, prevail, Rom. 5:14, 17, 21; met. to be in kingly case, fare royally, 1 Cor. 4:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βασιλεύω βασιλεύς to be king, to rule, reign, Hom., etc.; of a woman, to be queen, id. Hom.; c. gen. to be king of, Od.; also, ὄφρ᾽ Ἰθάκης κατὰ δῆμον βασιλεύοι id. Od.; in aor. to have become king, Hdt.; c. dat. to be king among others, Od.:—Pass. to be governed by a king, Plat.: to submit to the king, Plut.

to be master of a thing, c. gen., Theocr.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
14%reigned
reigned14% · 3×reign14% · 3×will reign10% · 2×they will reign10% · 2×he will reign10% · 2×may reign5% · 1×should reign5% · 1×you reigned5% · 1×other renderings29% · 6×

21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 21 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἱερεύςa priestμέγας
ἐγώ
θέλωI will, wish, deχωρίςapart from, with
ἈρχέλαοςArchelaus
ὅτιthat, since, bec
οὗτος
θέλωI will, wish, de
ἀλλάbut, except
βασιλεύωreigned21×
what comes after →
Article the
ἁμαρτίαa sinἸουδαίαJudeaθάνατοςdeath
ἐπί
Article theἐγώαὐτός
διά
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnes
καίand, even, also, nam
ὄφελονO that! I wish! κύριοςlord, Lord, mast
εἰς
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβασιλεύω · 21× in the New Testament
Revelation Romans 1 Corinthians Luke 1 Timothy Matthew
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 114 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Confusion of Tongues 91c. AD 40

1,11) τῷ βασιλεύειν δοκοῦντι νῷ, βουλόμενοι τοῦτο ἐνδείξασθαι, ὅτι δοῦλον μὲν τὸ ἀγαθὸν κακοῦ πάθος τ’ εὐπαθείας δυνατώτερον, φρόνησις δὲ καὶ πᾶσα ἀρετὴ ἀφροσύνης καὶ κακίας ἁπάσης ὑπήκοον, ὡς ὑπηρετεῖν ἐξ ἀνάγκης ἅττ’ ἂν προστάττῃ τὸ δεσπόζον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.159c. AD 75–95

Ἁβράμης ἐβασίλευσεν ἔπηλυς σὺν στρατῷ ἀφιγμένος ἐκ τῆς γῆς τῆς ὑπὲρ Βαβυλῶνος Χαλδαίων λεγομένης.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.4c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ οὕτως καὶ ὁ προφήτης: Βασιλεῖαι δέκα ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς βασιλεύσουσιν, καὶ ἐξαναστήσεται ὄπισθεν μικρὸς βασιλεύς, ὃς ταπεινώσει τρεῖς ὑφ̓ ἓν τῶν βασιλέων.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 1st c. BC 6th c. AD undated 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

Column i βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ ἐφʼ ἱερέων

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
θάνατοςthanatos death G2288 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
120× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means death, whether it's physical or spiritual. It's used in many places, like John 11:13 and Romans 8:38, to describe the end of life or separation from God. It's the opposite of life.
Amplified meaning
physical and spiritual separation from God
Tyndale gloss
death
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θάνατος (thanatos) means 'death' and can refer to both natural and violent forms of death. It encompasses physical death, spiritual death, and even metaphorical uses, such as the death of Christ. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including imminent danger and eternal death. Notably, it is contrasted with ζωή (zoe), meaning 'life'.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θάνατος, -ου, ὁ (θνήσκω),

[in LXX chiefly for מָוֶת ,מוּת, sometimes דֶּבֶר;]

death;

of the death of the body, whether natural or violent: Jo 11:13, Phl 2:27, He 7:23, al; opp. to ζωή, Ro 8:38, Phl 1:20; of the death of Christ, Ro 5:10, Phl 3:10, He 2:9; ῥυέσθαι (σώζειν) ἐκ θ., II Co 1:10, He 5:7; περίλυπος ἕως θανάτου, Mt 26:38, Mk 14:34; μέχρι (ἄχρι) θ., Phl 2:8, Re 2:10; πληγὴ…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θάνατος, -ov, 6, (θανεῖν); Sept. for ny) and ny, also for 727 pestilence [W. 29 note]; (one of the nouns often anarthrous, ef. W. § 19, 1s. v.; [B. § 124, 8¢.]; Grimm, Com. on Sap. p. 59); death; 1. prop. the death of the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent) of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts ii. 24 [Trmrg. ἅδου] (on this see ddiv); Phil. ii. 27,30; Heb. vii. 23; ix. 15 sq.; Rev. ix. 6; xviii. 8; opp. to ζωή, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; 2Co.i. 9; Phil. i. 20; with the implied idea of future misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. xv. 21; 2 Tim. i. 10; Heb. ii. 14 sq.; 1. q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12. Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was conceived of as being very dark, χώρα καὶ σκιὰ θανάτου (ayy) is equiv. to the region of thickest darkness, i. e. figuratively, a region enveloped in the darkness of…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θάνατος. For this common noun we may cite such passages as P Petr IIT. 36 (2)? τ]ὸν θάνατον ὑποκείμενον [ἐν] τῆι φυλακῆι διὰ τὴν ἔνδειαν, P Tebt I. 5% (B.c. 118) τοὺς δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιοῦντας θαν[άτωι ζ]ημιοῦσθαι, P Oxy III. 4727 (c. Α.Ὁ. 130) ἄλλοι πολλοὶ τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ζῆν προκρείναντες, 12. 11. 2370}. 36 (A.D. 186) ἡ δὲ κτῆσις μετὰ θάνατον τοῖς τέκνοις κεκράτηται, “but the right of ownership after their death has been settled upon the children” (Edd.). The wellknown inscr. at the entrance of the inner court of the Temple at Jerusalem, threatening all who were not Jews with the penalty of death for entering, ends—és 8’ ἂν ληφθῇ, ἑαυτῶι αἴτιος ἔσται διὰ τὸ ἐξακολουθεῖν θάνατον (OG/S 5087, i/A.D.). In a Latin papyrus containing military accounts, | P Fay rosiii 24 (c. a.p. 180), opposite the name Turbon a letter @ has been inserted, implying, according to the editors, that he has died.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θάνατος (thanatos) — death.

θάνᾰτος [θᾰ], ὁ,

(θνῄσκω) death, whether natural or violent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τῶν ὑπαλευάμενος θάνατον the death threatened by them, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θάνατόνδε to death, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θανάτου τέλος, μοῖρα, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θανάτου πέρι καὶ ζωᾶς for life and death, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πόλεώς ἐστι θ., ἀνάστατον γενέσθαι it is its death, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; γῆρας ζῶν θ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; θάνατον ἀποθνῄσκειν, τελευτᾶν, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. in Law, death-penalty, θάνατον καταγνῶναί τινος to pass sentence of death on one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θανάτου δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὸς τοὺς ἐχθροὺς.. ἀγωνίσασθαι περὶ θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θ. τῆς ζημίας ἐπικειμένης the penalty is death…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

θάνατος

thanatos

from 2348; (properly, an adjective used as a noun) death (literally or

figuratively):--X deadly, (be...) death.

see GREEK for 2348

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θάνατος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

death

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θάνατος thanatos 120x

death, the extinction of life, whether naturally, Lk. 2:26; Mk. 9:1; or violently, Mt. 10:21; 15:4; imminent danger of death, 2 Cor. 4:11, 12; 11:23; in NT spiritual death, as opposed to ζωή in its spiritual sense, in respect of a forfeiture of salvation, Jn. 8:51; Rom. 6:16

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θάνατος θάνα^τος, ὁ, θνήσκω death, Hom., etc.; θ. τινος the death threatened by him, Od.; θάνατόνδε to death, Il., etc.

in attic, θάνατον καταγιγνώσκειν τινός to pass sentence of death on one, Thuc.; θανάτου κρίνεσθαι to be tried for one's life, id. Thuc.:—ellipt., τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ κεκοσμημένος (sc. στολήν) Hdt.; δῆσαί τινα τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτου (sc. δέσιν) id. Hdt.; τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις ἐπιτρέψαι περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν πλὴν θανάτου for any penalty short of death, Thuc.

pl. θάνατοι, kinds of death, Od.; or the deaths of several persons or even of one person, Trag.

as prop. n., Θάνατος Death, twin-brother of Sleep, Il.

= νεκρός, Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

(maweth; thanatos):

PHYSIOLOGICAL AND FIGURATIVE VIEW

The word "Death" is used in the sense of

(1) the process of dying (Ge 21:16);

(2) the period of decease (Ge 27:7);

(3) as a possible synonym for poison (2Ki 4:40);

(4) as descriptive of person in danger of perishing (Jud 15:18; "in deaths oft" 2Co 11:23). In this sense the shadow of death is a familiar expression in Job, the Psalms and the Prophets;

(5) death is personified in 1Co 15:55 and Re 20:14. Deliverance from this catastrophe is called the "issues from…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Death

May be simply defined as the termination of life. It is represented under a variety of aspects in Scripture: (1.) “The dust shall return to the earth as it was” (Eccl. 12:7).

(2.) “Thou takest away their breath, they die” (Ps. 104:29).

(3.) It is the dissolution of “our earthly house of this tabernacle” (2 Cor. 5:1); the “putting off this tabernacle” (2 Pet. 1:13, 14).

(4.) Being “unclothed” (2 Cor. 5:3, 4).

(5.) “Falling on sleep” (Ps. 76:5; Jer. 51:39;

Is taken in Scripture, first, for the separation of body and soul, the first death, Ge 25:11; secondly, for alienation from God, and exposure to his wrath, 1Jo 3:14, etc.; thirdly, for the second death, that of eternal damnation. Death was the penalty affixed to Adam’s transgression, Ge 2:17 3:19; and all his posterity are transgressors, and share the curse inflicted upon him. CHRIST is "our life." All believers share his life, spiritually and eternally; and though sin and bodily is taken away, and in the resurrection the last enemy shall be trampled under foot, Ro 5:12-21 1Co 15:1-58.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Miscellaneous Subjects

Called GIVING UP THE GHOST Ge 25:8; 35:29; La 1:19; Ac 5:10

KING OF TERRORS Job 18:14

A CHANGE Job 14:14

GOING TO THY FATHERS Ge 15:15; 25:8; 35:29

PUTTING OFF THIS TABERNACLE 2Pe 1:14

REQUIRING THE SOUL Lu 12:20

GOING THE WAY WHENCE THERE IS NO RETURN Job 16:22

BEING GATHERED TO OUR PEOPLE Ge 49:33

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
94%death
death94% · 113×other renderings4% · 5×other renderings2% · 2×

120 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial45%subject23%object22%predicate8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 120 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
διάκαίand, even, also,ἐκ
εἰς
ἀδελφόςa brotherαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
γεύομαιI taste, experience
μήNegπᾶςall, the whole,
πρός
μήNegεἰμίI am, existἁμαρτίαa sin
ἄξιοςworthy, worthy of, d
οὐδείςno one, none, noδέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,
θάνατοςdeath120×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπατήρfather, Father, οὐNeg
Article the
δεύτερος& Advδέbut, on the otheυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
ἐκεῖνοςβαπτίζωI dip, submerge,ἀλλάbut, except
εἰς
Article theνῖκοςvictoryθάνατοςdeath
εἰμίI am, exist
πράσσωI do, fare, requοὐNegἁμαρτίαa sin

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθάνατος · 120× in the New Testament
Romans Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Acts John Luke Matthew 1 John Mark Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 160 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 104c. AD 40

τὴν δεκάτην δ’ εἴ τις τελέσας κατὰ μέτρον ἵκοιτο, οὐκ ἂν ἄωρος ἐὼν μοῖραν ἔχοι θανάτου.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.168c. AD 75–95

Ὡς δʼ ἀφικομένων τῶν παίδων Ἰάκωβος τὰ περὶ τὸν Ἰώσηπον ἔμαθεν, ὅτι μὴ μόνον εἴη τὸν θάνατον διαπεφευγὼς ἐφʼ ᾧ πενθῶν διῆγεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ζῇ μετὰ λαμπρᾶς εὐδαιμονίας βασιλεῖ συνδιέπων τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ τὴν ἅπασαν σχεδὸν ἐγκεχειρισμένος αὐτῆς ἐπιμέλειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.6c. AD 100

οἱ προφῆται, ἀπ̓ αὐτοῦ ἔχοντες τὴν χάριν, εἰς αὐτὸν ἐπροφήτευσαν: αὐτὸς δέ, ἵνα καταργήσῃ τὸν θάνατον καὶ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν δείξῃ, ὅτι ὲν σαρκὶ ἕδει αὐτὸν φανερωθῆναι, ὑπέμεινεν,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Tebt. 2 304Tebtynis (ArsinoitesAD 168

ἐποίησαν ὡς ἐκ τούτου τῷ ζῆν κινδυνεύειν. ὅθεν, κύριε, εὐλαβῶς ἔχων τὸν περὶ τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ κινδυνον ἐπιδίδωμικαὶ ἀξιῶ κελεῦσαι ἀχθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐπὶ σὲ πρὸς τὸ τὸ ἀκόλουθον γείνεσθαι

P.Diog. 11Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 213

μεσιτείας μου γεναμένης καὶ διέταξα τῷ υἱῷ μου Ἰσιδώρῳ πρὸ μιᾶς ἡμέρας μου τοῦ θανάτου εἴ τί μοι ὑπάρχει ἀγρῶν τε καὶ οἰκοπέδων καὶ χρυσία καὶ ἱμάτια καὶ

P.Diog. 12Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 213

μεσιτείας μου γενομένης καὶ διέταξα τῷ υἱῷ μου Ἰσιδώρῳ πρὸ μιᾶς ἡμέρας μου τοῦ θανάτου εἴ τί μοι ὑπάρχει ἀγρῶν τε καὶ οἰκοπέδων καὶ χρυσία καὶ ἱμάτια καὶ

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἀπὸapo from G575 Preposition
647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.
Tyndale gloss
away from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%from
from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen
Article the
τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά
ἀπόfrom647×
what comes after →
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἈδὰμAdam Adam G76 Noun · proper name, indeclinable
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Adam, the first man created by God, is what this word represents. It is also used to symbolize Jesus as the representative of humanity.
Amplified meaning
the first man
Tyndale gloss
Adam
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἀδάμ (transliterated as *Adám*) is an indeclinable proper noun referring to Adam, the first man in biblical tradition. It appears in several New Testament passages, where it is often contrasted with Christ as the 'last Adam.' The entries indicate that it can represent both the historical figure and, in a theological context, humanity as a whole.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἀδάμ, ὁ indecl. (Heb. אָדָם),

Adam: Lk 3:38, Ro 5:14, I Co 15:22, 45, I Ti 2:13, 14 Ju 14. Christ ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀ., I Co 15:45.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

᾿Αδάμ, indecl. prop. name (but in Joseph.” Aéapos, -ov), DW (i. 6. ace. to Philo, de leg. alleg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62 ed. Mang., γήϊνος ; ace. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 γηγενής ; ace. to Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 2 πυρρός, with which Gesenius agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first man and the parent of the whole human race: Lk. iii. 38 ; Ro. v.14; 1 Co. xv. 22, 45; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq.; Jude 14. In accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the former Adam (}1W877 D1), the first man, the author of ‘all our woe,’ and the latter Adam (}}7n87 078), the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ is called ὁ ἔσχατος ᾿Αδάμ (see ἔσχατος, 1) and contrasted with ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος ; Ro. v. 14 6 μέλλων se. ᾿Αδάμ. [2. one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 WH mrg. (cf. ’Adpeiv).]

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἀδάμ (Adam) — Adam.

Ἀδάμ, ὁ indecl. (Heb. אָדָם),

Adam: Luk.3:38, Rom.5:14, 1Co.15:22,45, 1Ti.2:13,14 Ju 14. Christ ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀ., 1Co.15:45.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἀδάμ

Adam

of Hebrew origin (121); Adam, the first man; typically (of Jesus) man

(as his representative):--Adam.

see HEBREW for 0121

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἀδάμ, ὁ

Prop.n.

Adam

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἀδάμ Adam 9x

Adam, pr. name, indecl.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-PRI — Noun · proper name, indeclinable
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-PRI Indeclinable PRoper Noun

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Adam

Red, a Babylonian word, the generic name for man, having the same meaning in the Hebrew and the Assyrian languages. It was the name given to the first man, whose creation, fall, and subsequent history and that of his descendants are detailed in the first book of Moses (Gen. 1:27-ch. 5). “God created man [Heb., Adam] in his own image, in the image of God created he him; male and female created he them.”

Adam was absolutely the first man whom God created. He was formed out of the dust of the earth (and hence his name), and God breathed into his nostrils the breath of life, and gave him dominion over all the lower creatures (Gen. 1:26; 2:7). He was placed after his creation in the Garden of Eden, to cultivate it, and to enjoy its fruits under this one prohibition: “Of the tree…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

a city on the Jordan, "beside Zaretan," in the time of Joshua. (Joshua 3:16)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

1. The progenitor and representative head of our race; formed of the dust of the ground, and made a living soul by the Creator’s breath. He was the last work of the creation, and received dominion over all that the earth contained. That he might not be alone, God provided Eve as a helpmeet for him, and she became his wife. Marriage is thus a divine institution, first in order of time, as well as of importance and blessedness to mankind. Adam was made a perfect man-complete in every physical, mental, and spiritual endowment; and placed in the Garden of Eden on probation, holy and happy, but liable to sin. From this estate he fell by breaking the express command of God, through the temptations of Satan and the compliance of Eve; and thus brought the curse upon himself and all his posterity. Sovereign grace interposed; a Savior was revealed, and the full execution of the curse stayed; but…

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

earthy; red

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%adam
adam100% · 9×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject56%adverbial33%predicate11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ΣήθPropἐν
ἀπό
θάνατοςdeathἕβδομοςseventh
παράβασιςa transgression
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
πρῶτοςfirst, before
ἔσχατοςlast, at the last, f
Article the
ἈδάμAdam
what comes after →
εἰς
ψυχήthe soul, life, πνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
Article the
θεόςGod, a god
μέχριas far as, until
ΜωϋσῆςMoses
ὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am a

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceἈδάμ · 9× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians 1 Timothy Romans Jude Luke
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 24 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 149c. AD 40

φησὶν οὖν ὅτι πάντα τὰ ζῷα ἤγαγεν ὁ θεὸς πρὸς τὸν Ἀδάμ, ἰδεῖν βουλόμενος τίνας θήσεται προσρήσεις ἑκάστοις, οὐχ ὅτι ἐνεδοίαζεν — ἄγνωστον γὰρ οὐδὲν θεῷ —, ἀλλ’ ὅτι ᾔδει τὴν λογικὴν ἐν θνητῷ φύσιν κατεσκευακὼς αὐτοκίνητον, ὅπως ἀμέτοχος αὐτὸς ᾖ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.9c. AD 100

ἄνθρωπος γὰρ γῆ ἐστιν πάσχουσα: ἀπὸ προσώπου γὰρ τῆς γῆς ἡ πλάσις τοῦ Ἀδὰμ ἐγένετο.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 6.3c. AD 96

ζῆλος ἀπηλλοτρίωσεν γαμετὰς ἀνδρῶν καὶ ἠλλοίωσεν τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀδάμ: Τοῦτο νῦν ὀστοῦν ἐκ τῶν ὀστέων μου καὶ σὰρξ ἐκ τῆς σαρκός μου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Rain.Unterricht 32Herakleopolites (?)AD 201–AD 400

r ονος Ἀδάμ … κτήματος ὀνόματος Παησίου ἄλλων οικεθ ονος ἀνέντος Πέτρου α … αμμοι κυρ μου

O.Douch 5 542Kysis (Oasis Magna)AD 301–AD 425

Ἀννουμέρις Ἀλεξάνδρῳ γεωργῷ χαίρειν. δὸς τῷ ἀδελφῷ Ἀδὰμ χόρτου πρασιὰν μίαν γίνεται χόρτου πρασιὰ α ε ἰνδικτίωνος. ἐρρῶσθαι.

P.Mich. 15 745AD 501–AD 700

μηχανὴ Ἀπιᾶ Ἰσὰκ Ἰωάννου Κολλασίμου Πρήου Φοιβάμμωνος Κληλὼ Θεοφίλου Ἰακῶβ μηχανὴ Ἀδάμ Μουσαῖος Ἰσὰκ πρεσβύτερος … ρουδα υἱός Ταρηουδα υἱός μηχανὴ Πη … ου Ἀποῦ πρεσβύτερος

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
μέχριmechri until G3360 Adverb
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Until means up to a certain point in time or place, like in Matthew 11:23 and Romans 5:14, where it talks about something happening until a specific time.
Tyndale gloss
until
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μέχρι (mechri) functions as a preposition with the genitive, meaning 'until' or 'as far as.' It covers various uses, including place, time, and measure, and can also serve as a conjunction. The New Testament uses it in verses like Matthew 11:23 and Romans 15:19. There is some variation in spelling, with μέχρις also appearing.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μέχρι

(bef. consonants, exc. Lk 16:16, μέχρι Ἰωάνου) and μέχρις (bef. vowels, Mk 13:30, Ga 4:19, He 12:4; v. Bl., § 5, 4),

as prep., c. gen., as far as, even to, until;

of place: Ro 15:19;

of time: Mt 11:23 13:30 28:15, Lk 16:16, Ac 10:30 20:7, Ro 5:14, I Ti 6:14, He 3:6, 14 9:10;

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέχρι (mechri) — until.

μέχρῐ,

and μέχρῐς, adverb as far as, so used chiefly in Prose and before a preposition, μέχρι πρός.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. ὅποι.. [Refs]; μ. ὅπου.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. νῦν (variant{τοῦ νῦν}) [Refs 1st c.BC+]; μέχρι πότε χηρεύομε; [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. preposition with genitive, even to, as far as,

II.1. of Place, μέχρι θαλάσσης [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely following its case, ὀμφαλοῦ μ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. of Time, τέο μέχρι; i.e. τίνος μέχρι χρόνο; how long? [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μέχρις τε; [Refs 7th c.BC+]; μέχρι οὗ, μέχρι ὅσου, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. τοσούτου, ἕως ἂν.. [Refs 5th c.BC+] up to my time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μ. τῆς ἐκείνου ζόης till the end of his life, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μέχρι μεχρίς μέχρι μεχρίς

mechri

or mechris mekh-ris'

from 3372; as far as, i.e. up to a certain point (as a preposition, of

extent (denoting the terminus, whereas 891 refers especially to the

space of time or place intervening) or conjunction):--till, (un-)to,

until.

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 891

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μέχρι

Adv

as far as, until

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μέχρι mechri 17x

improper prep. and a conj (until), can also spelled μέχρις, unto, even to, Rom. 15:19; of time, until, till, Mt. 11:23; Mk. 13:30

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μέχρι to a given point, even so far,

before a prep. μέχρι πρός, Lat. usque ad, Plat.:—so before Advs., μ. δεῦρο τοῦ λόγου id. Plat.; μ. τότε Thuc.

serving as a prep. c. gen. even to, as far as,

of Place, μέχρι θαλάσσης Il.; μ. τῆς πόλεως Thuc.

of Time, τέο μέχρις; i. e. τινός μέχρι χρόνου; Lat. quousque? how long? Il.; so, μέχρι οὗ; μέχρι ὅσου; Hdt.; with the Art., τὸ μ. ἐμεῦ up to my time, id. Hdt.

of Measure or Degree, μ. σοῦ δικαίου so far as consists with right, Thuc.; μ. τοῦ δυνατοῦ Plat.

with Numbers, up to, about, nearly, sometimes without altering the case of the Subst., μέχρι τριάκοντα ἔτη Aeschin.

in ionic, μέχρι οὗ is sometimes used like the simple μέχρι, μέχρι οὗ ὀκτὼ πύργων Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%until
until67% · 12×unto28% · 5×even to6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial89%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἄνDisj
μένωI remain, abide
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
παρά
οὗτος
γενεάa generation
προφήτηςa prophet, poet
Article the
ἡμέραa day
τέταρτοςfourth
μέχριuntil18×
what comes after →
Article the
σήμερονtoday, nowἸλλυρικόνIllyricumἐπιφάνειαappearing, manif
ὅς
οὗτοςμορφόωI form, fashion,
θάνατοςdeath
θάνατοςdeathἐγγίζωI come near, app
τέλοςan end, purpose, tax
βέβαιοςfirm, steadfast,
ἸωάννηςJohn
ἀπό

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμέχρι · 18× in the New Testament
Hebrews Acts Matthew Philippians Romans 1 Timothy 2 Timothy Ephesians Galatians Luke Mark
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 12 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 50c. AD 40

τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐν ἐπιπέδῳ τρίγωνον ἵσταται μέχρι τριάδος, τὸ δ’ ἐπιτεθὲν τετράδα μὲν ἐν ἀριθμοῖς, ἐν δὲ σχήμασι πυραμίδα γεννᾷ, στερεὸν ἤδη σῶμα.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 4.9c. AD 96

ζῆλος ἐποίησεν Ἰωσὴφ μέχρι θανάτου διωχθῆναι καὶ μέχρι δουλείας εἰσελθεῖν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

οὕτως ὑπὸ γε… ς δεομένων δὲ τῶν … ντων ὑμῶν διαλήψεως … καὶ οὐδὲ μέχρι τοῦ νῦν οὐδενός … ς ἀξιοῦμεν … ἀνθρώπου ἀλόγως … ὀφείλει ἡμῖν διάφορα

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

συνγενόμενοι Ὥρωι Ψεν … λειτουργῶι μέχρι τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν

P.Bour. 10Pathyris89 BC

τόπον καὶ προιστάμενος· τοὺς δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ΜωϋσέωςMōusēs, Mōsēs Moses G3475 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
80× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Moses was the Hebrew lawgiver, who received the Ten Commandments from God. He is mentioned in Matthew 8:4 and 17:3-4. Moses is a key figure in the Bible.
Tyndale gloss
Moses
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Μωϋσῆς (transliterated as Mōusēs) refers to Moses, the Hebrew lawgiver. It appears in various forms in the New Testament, including references to the law of Moses and the books attributed to him. Notably, there are variations in spelling, with Μωσῆς also being used. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dat. -ῆ (as LXX: Ex 5:20, al.), and -εῖ, acc. -ῆν (as LXX) and -έα (Lk 16:29 only), (Heb. מֹשֶׁה),

Moses: Mt 8:4 17:3, 4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Lk 2:22 24:44, Jo 7:23, Ac 13:39 15:5 28:23, I Co 9:9, He 10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Lk 16:29 24:27, Ac 15:21, II Co…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Μωσῆς (constantly so in the text. Rec. [in Strabo (16, 2, 35 ed. Meineke); Dan. ix. 10, 11, Sept.], and in Philo [cf. his “ Buch ν. ἃ. Weltschopf.” ed. Miiller p. 117 (but Richter in his ed. has adopted Μωῦσῆς)], after the Hebr. form Aw, which in Ex. ii. 10 is derived fr. Aw to draw out), and Mwic4s (soin the Sept. [see Tdf.’s 4th ed. Proleg. p. xlii.], Josephus [“in Josephus the readings vary; in the Antiquities he still adheres to the classic form (Μωσῆς), which moreover is the common form in his writings,” Miiller’s note on Joseph. ὁ. Ap. 1, 31,4. (Here, again, recent editors, as Bekker, adopt Moiojs uniformly.) On the fluctuation of Mss. ef. Otto’s note on Justin Mart. apol. i. § 32 init.], and in the N. T. ed. Tdf.;— a word which signifies in Egyptian watersaved, i. 6. ‘saved from water’; οἵ. Fritzsche, Rom. vol. ii. p. 818; and esp. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p.824; Knobel on Ex. ii.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Μωϋσῆς, Μωσῆς (Mōusēs, Mōsēs) — Moses.

Μωυσῆς (Μωϋσῆς, T; Μωσῆς, Rec.), -έως, dative - (as LXX: Exo.5:20, al.), and -εῖ, accusative -ῆν (ac LXX) and -έα (Luk.16:29 only) (Heb. מֹשֶׁה),

Moses: Mat.8:4 17:3-4, al.; νόμος Μωυσέως, Luk.2:22 24:44, Jhn.7:23, Act.13:39 15:5 28:23, 1Co.9:9, Heb.10:28; by meton., of the books of Moses, Luk.16:29 24:27, Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Μωϋσῆς

Moseus

or Moses mo-sace',

or Mouses mo-oo-sace'

of Hebrew origin; (4872); Moseus, Moses, or Mouses (i.e. Mosheh), the

Hebrew lawgiver:--Moses.

see HEBREW for 04872

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Μωσῆς, έως, ὁ

n.m.

Moses

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Μωϋσῆς Mōysēs 80x

also spelled Μωσῆς, Moses, pr. name, Mt. 8:4; Jn. 1:17; Rom. 5:14

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

mo'-zez, mo'-ziz (mosheh; Egyptian mes, "drawn out," "born"; Septuagint Mouse(s)). The great Hebrew national hero, leader, author, law-giver and prophet.

I. LIFE

1. Son of Levi

2. Foundling Prince

3. Friend of the People

4. Refuge in Midian

5. Leader of Israel

II. WORK AND CHARACTER

1. The Author

2. The Lawgiver

3. The Prophet

LITERATURE

The traditional view of the Jewish church and of the Christian church, that Moses was a person and that the narrative with which his life-story is interwoven is real history, is in the main sustained by commentators and critics of all classes.

It is needless to mention the old writers among whom these questions were hardly under discussion. Among the advocates of the current radical criticism may be mentioned Stade and Renan, who minimize the historicity of the Bible narrative at this point. Renan thinks the narrative "may be very probable." Ewald, Wellhausen…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Moses

Drawn (or Egypt. mesu, “son;” hence Rameses, royal son). On the invitation of Pharaoh (Gen. 45:17-25), Jacob and his sons went down into Egypt. This immigration took place probably about 350 years before the birth of Moses. Some centuries before Joseph, Egypt had been conquered by a pastoral Semitic race from Asia, the Hyksos, who brought into cruel subjection the native Egyptians, who were an African race. Jacob and his retinue were accustomed to a shepherd’s life, and on their arrival in Egypt were received with favour by the king, who assigned them the “best of the land”, the land of Goshen, to dwell in. The Hyksos or “shepherd” king who thus showed favour to Joseph and his family was in all probability the Pharaoh Apopi (or Apopis).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(Heb. Mosheh , "drawn," i.e. from the water; in the Coptic it means "saved from the water"), the legislator of the Jewish people, and in a certain sense the founder of the Jewish religion. The immediate pedigree of Moses is as follows: Levi was the father of: Gershon -- Kohath -- Merari Kohath was the father of: Amram = Jochebed Amram = Jochebed was the father of: Hur = Miriam -- Aaron = Elisheba -- Moses = Zipporah Aaron = Elisheba was the father of: Nadab -- Abihu -- Eleazar -- Ithamar Eleazar was the father of: Phineas Moses = Zipporah was the father of: Gershom -- Eliezer Gershom was the father of: Jonathan The history of Moses naturally divides itself into three periods of 40 years each. Moses was born at Goshen, In Egypt, B.C. 1571. The story of his birth is thoroughly Egyptian in its scene. His mother made extraordinary efforts for his preservation from the general destruction of…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The name of the illustrious prophet and legislator of the Hebrews, who led them from Egypt to the Promised Land. Having been originally imposed by a native Egyptian princess, the word is no doubt Egyptian in its origin, and Josephus gives its true derivation—from the two Egyptian words, MO, water, and USE, saved. With this accords the Septuagint form, MOUSES. The Hebrews by a slight change accommodated it to their own language, as they did also in the case of some other foreign words; calling it MOSHIE, from the verb MASHA, to draw. See Ex 2:10. Moses was born about 15.71 B. C., the son of Amram and Jochebed, of the tribe of Levi, and the younger brother of Miriam and Aaron. His history is too extensive to permit insertion here, and in general too well known to need it. It is enough simply to remark, that it is divided into three…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
95%moses
moses95% · 75×moses?3% · 2×moses’3% · 2×

79 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject50%adverbial25%object9%indirect object8%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 80 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπίἐκδέbut, on the othe
νόμοςa law, the Mosaic La
Article theἐντὶς
καίand, even, also, nam
εἷςoneνεκρόςdead, a corpseγίνομαιI come into bein
προστάσσωI instruct, command,
ὅςκαθώςjust as, as
διδάσκαλοςa teacher
λέγωI say, speak
ΜωϋσῆςMoses80×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἨλίαςElijahεἰμίI am, exist
εἰς
μαρτύριονwitness, evidencὅς
γάρfor
λέγωI say, speakἐκγράφωI write
δίδωμιI offer, give
σύArticle the
λέγωI say, speak
ἐάνCondἐγώἔκφοβοςgreatly terrifie

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΜωϋσῆς · 80× in the New Testament
Acts John Hebrews Luke Mark Matthew Romans 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy Jude Revelation
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 600 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 2c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δ’ ἑκάτερον ὑπερβάς, τὸ μὲν ὡς ἄσκεπτον καὶ ἀταλαίπωρον καὶ ἀφιλόσοφον, τὸ δ’ ὡς κατεψευσμένον καὶ μεστὸν γοητείας, παγκάλην καὶ σεμνοτάτην ἀρχὴν ἐποιήσατο τῶν νόμων, μήτ’ εὐθὺς ἃ χρὴ πράττειν ἢ τοὐναντίον ὑπειπὼν μήτ’, ἐπειδὴ προτυπῶσαι τὰς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.21c. AD 75–95

τοῦτο δὴ παιδεῦσαι βουληθεὶς Μωυσῆς τὸ παίδευμα τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ πολίτας τῆς τῶν νόμων θέσεως οὐκ ἀπὸ συμβολαίων καὶ τῶν πρὸς ἀλλήλους δικαίων ἤρξατο τοῖς ἄλλοις παραπλησίως, ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν καὶ τὴν τοῦ κόσμου κατασκευὴν τὰς γνώμας αὐτῶν ἀναγαγὼν καὶ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.7c. AD 100

ἡμῶν μέν: ἀλλ̓ ἐκεῖνοι οὕτως εἰς τέλος ἀπώλεσαν αὐτὴν λαβόντος ἤδη τοῦ Μωϋσέως.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Lond. 6 1916Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 330–AD 340

καὶ ἄπα Σουροῦ καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς περὶ ὑμᾶς κατʼ ὄνομα Μωυσῆς καὶ Ἑριηοῦς οἱ ὑποδεέστεροι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ χαίρειν. πρῶτον μὲν τὴν προσκύνησιν ὑμῶν ποιούμενοι,

Stud.Pal. 8 799Arsinoites (?)AD 401–AD 600

παρέσχε Μωυσῆς ἀπὸ φόρου κήπου νομισμάτια δύο ῥυπαρὰ νομισμάτια β ῥυπαρὰ μόνα Τῦβι ε η ἰνδικτίονος

BGU 3 736Arsinoiton PolisAD 544

ζ η ἰνδικτίωνος ἐπʼ Ἀρσινόης. Αὐρήλιοι Ἀπόλλων υἱὸς Ἀ … α … … καὶ Μωύσης υἱὸς Γεροντίου ἀπὸ κώμης Δι … Αὐρηλίῳ ἄπα Ὂλ υἱῷ Ἰουλίου … ρ

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
καὶkai even G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Romans than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίeven8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἐπὶepi over G1909 Preposition
886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.
Tyndale gloss
upon/to/against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%upon
upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
Article theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m
πίπτωI fall, fall under
δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,
ἐπίover886×
what comes after →
Article the
γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theὅςκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,Article theπᾶςall, the whole,
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
τοὺςho those G3588 Article · accusative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APM — Article · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
those19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
μὴ not G3361 Particle · negative
1,060× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Not is a word used to show that something is not true or is not happening, like in phrases that say 'lest' or 'God forbid', as seen in various parts of the New Testament.
Tyndale gloss
not
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μή () is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μή,

subjective negative particle,

used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]

As a neg. adv., not;

with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.

In delib. questions, c. subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mk 12:14, Ro 3:8.

In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mt 10:14,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μή (mē) — not.

μή,

Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)

__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,

__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μή

me

a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an

absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an

interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an

affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +

lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,

nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in

substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,

3373, 3375, 3378.

see GREEK for 3756

see GREEK for 3362

see GREEK for 3363

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

see GREEK for 3373

see GREEK for 3375

see GREEK for 3378

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μή

Neg.prt.

not, lest

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μή mē 1x

a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
71%not
not71% · 772×except9% · 95×unless5% · 58×surely not4% · 41×lest3% · 32×otherwise2% · 23×other renderings4% · 48×other renderings1% · 16×

1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial84%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,σύἐγώ
ἵναin order that, so th
αὐτόςσύπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώαὐτόςεἰμίI am, exist
εἰCond
αὐτόςυἱόςa son, descendenκαίand, even, also,
Article the
καίand, even, also,εἰςδιά
μήnot1060×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, υἱόςa son, descendenσημεῖονa sign, miracle,
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
καίand, even, also,ποιμήνa shepherdβάθοςdepth, a depth,
εἰμίI am, exist
δίδωμιI offer, giveἐνμετά
τὶς
σύὑστερέωI am lacking, faγεννάωI beget, bring f
φοβέωI fear, am terrified
ἀπόArticle theμόνοςalone, but, only

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμή · 1,060× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy Galatians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἁμαρτήσανταςhamartanō having sinned G264 Verb · aorist · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
43× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To sin or miss the mark is the meaning of this word, as seen in Matthew 18:25 and Romans 3:23. It involves falling short of God's standards or making a mistake, often with moral implications. This concept is central to the Bible's teachings on human nature and redemption.
Amplified meaning
miss the mark, fall short
Tyndale gloss
to sin
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἁμαρτάνω (i.e., *hamartano*) means to miss the mark, often used metaphorically to signify sin or wrongdoing. It is derived from the root meaning to miss and encompasses a range of meanings from failing to achieve a goal to violating God's law. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 18:25 and Romans 3:23, highlighting its moral implications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἁμαρτάνω

(pres. formed from aor. ἁμαρτεῖν),

[in LXX for חטא, also for אשׁם, רשׁע, etc.;]

to miss the mark (Hom., Æsch., al.), hence metaph. (Hom., al.), to err, do wrong.

In LXX and NT, to violate God's law, to sin (for non-Christian exx., v. MM, VGT, s.v.): absol., Mt 18:25 27:4, Lk 17:3, Jo 5:14 8:11 9:2, 3, Ro 2:12 3:23 5:12, 14,16 6:15, I Co 7:28,36 15:34, Eph 4:26, I Ti 5:20, Tit 3:11, He 3:17 10:26,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἁμαρτάνω ; fut. ἁμαρτήσω (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15; in the latter pass. LT Tr WH give ἁμαρτήσωμεν for RG ἁμαρτήσομεν), in class. Grk. ἁμαρτήσομαι; 1 aor. (later) ἡμάρτησα, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, 16 (ef. W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. ἥμαρτον; pf. ἡμάρτηκα; (ace. to a conjecture of Bitm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. a priv. and μείρω. peipopat, μέρος, prop. to be without a share in, sc. the mark); prop. to miss the mark, (Hom. Il. 8, 311, ete.; with gen. of the thing missed, Hom. II. 10, 372; 4,491; τοῦ σκοποῦ, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a.; τῆς ὁδοῦ, Arstph. Plut. 961, al.); then to err, be mistaken; lastly to miss or wander from the path of uprightness and honor, to door go wrong. [Even the Sept., although the Hebr. son also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve duapt. exclusively for the idea of sin; and where the Hebr. signifies to miss one’s aim in the literal sense, they avail…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἁμαρτάνω. It will be convenient to give (non-Christian) citations for this important word fully. In a private letter of the time of Augustus the writer complains—éy@ μὲν οὐ δοκῶι ἄξιος εἶναι ὑβρίζεσθαι .. . οὐδὲ γὰρ ἡμάρτηκά τι εἰς σέ (cf. Ac 25%, etc.), BGU IV. 11414: cf. 1. δ ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἐπιστολῇ οὐθὲν ἁμάρτημα ever (1. ἔνι -- ἔνεστι).. BGU III. 846 (i/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93, Documents, p. 259) is an illiterate appeal from Antonius Longus to his mother entreating her to be reconciled to him. He makes his daily prayer to Serapis for her, etc.—Aouroy οἶδα τί αἰμαυτῷ παρέσχημαι, παιπαίδδευμαι καθ᾽ ὃν δὴ (corrected from δὶ) τρόπον, οἶδα, ὅτι ἡμάρτηκα (1. ro ff.), ““ But I know I have been punished with what I have brought upon myself, in a way that I know, for I have sinned”: cf. Lk 1518 #1 In the interesting rescript of an Emperor to the Jews, P Par 685°f-, we read, καὶ yap τοὺς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἁμαρτάνω (hamartanō) — to sin.

ἁμαρτάνω [ᾰμ.. ᾰν]:

future ἁμαρτήσομαι[Refs 8th c.BC+] later -ήσω [NT+2nd c.AD+], (δι-) [Refs 5th c.BC+], (ἐξ-) [Refs]Acut. (Sp.)[Refs]aorist 2 ἥμαρτον[Refs 6th c.BC+], Attic dialect; Epic dialect ἤμβροτον, but only indicative; Aeolic dialect 3rd.pers.singular ἄμβροτε[Refs 7th c.BC+], infinitive ἀμβρότην[Refs]; optative ἁμάρτοιν (for ἁμάρτοιμι) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἡμάρτησα[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἡμάρτηκα[Refs 5th c.BC+], Attic dialect:—passive, aorist ἡμαρτήθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἡμάρτημαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἡμάρτητο[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—miss the mark, especially of spear thrown, absolutely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἁ. τῆς ὁδοῦ miss road, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἁμαρτάνω

hamartano

perhaps from 1 (as a negative particle) and the base of 3313;

properly, to miss the mark (and so not share in the prize), i.e.

(figuratively) to err, especially (morally) to sin:--for your faults,

offend, sin, trespass.

see GREEK for 1

see GREEK for 3313

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἁμαρτάνω

v.

I sin

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἁμαρτάνω hamartanō 43x

pr. to miss a mark; to be in error, 1 Cor. 15:34; Tit. 3:11; to sin, Jn. 5:14; to be guilty of wrong, Mt. 18:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἁμαρτάνω Root ΑΜΑΡΤ to miss, miss the mark, c. gen., ἑκὼν ἡμάρτανε φωτός he missed the man on purpose, Il.; ἁμ. τῆς ὁδοῦ to miss the road, Ar.; τοῦ σκοποῦ Antipho.

generally, to fail of doing, fail of one's purpose, to miss one's point, fail, go wrong, Od., etc.; c. gen., νοήματος ἤμβροτεν failed in hitting upon the thought, id. Od., etc.; ἁμ. τοῦ χρησμοῦ to mistake it, Hdt.

to fail of having, i. e. to be deprived of, lose, c. gen., ἁμαρτήσεσθαι ὀπωπῆς that I should lose my sight, Od.; ἁμ. πιστῆς ἀλόχου Eur.

to fail, do wrong, err, sin, Hom., etc.; c. dat. modi, γνώμῃ ἁμ. to err in judgment, Hdt.; or ἐν λόγοις id. Hdt., Plat.; with a neut. adj., τόδε γ᾽ ἤμβροτον I erred in this, Od.; in Prose, ἁμ. περί τι ἁμ. περί τι to do wrong in a matter, Plat.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-APM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · accusative · plural · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-APM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
16%sinning
sinning16% · 7×having sinned9% · 4×do sin9% · 4×have sinned7% · 3×sinned7% · 3×shall sin7% · 3×sins5% · 2×i have sinned5% · 2×other renderings35% · 15×

43 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb93%object5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 43 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
γαμέωI marryπαρθένοςa virginποιέωI do, make
μήNeg
καίand, even, also,Article theἵναin order that, s
Article the
οὐχίIrgπᾶςall, the whole, ζωήlife
δέbut, on the other ha
ἐάνCondοὕτωthus, so, in thi
πατήρfather, Father, ance
αὐτός
ἁμαρτάνωhaving sinned43×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article theἐγώσύ
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherδώρημαa gift, bountyἥλιοςthe sun, sunligh
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐάνCondὑστερέωI am lacking, faκολαφίζωI strike with th
ὅτιthat, since, because
οὐNegἐκ
οὐNeg
φείδομαιI spare, abstainὁράωI see, look upon

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἁμαρτάνω · 43× in the New Testament
1 John 1 Corinthians Romans John Luke Matthew Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Peter Acts Ephesians
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 127 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.35c. AD 40

τάχα δὲ μηδὲ ἁμαρτάνειν φήσει τὸ παράπαν, εἴ γε τὰ ἀκούσια καὶ κατὰ ἄγνοιαν οὐδὲ ἀδικημάτων ἔχειν λόγον φασί τινες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 4.180c. AD 75–95

μόνος γὰρ οὗτος δοῦναί τε ταῦτα τοῖς ἀξίοις καὶ ἀφελέσθαι τῶν ἁμαρτανόντων εἰς αὐτὸν ἱκανός, ᾧ παρέχοντες ἑαυτοὺς οἵους αὐτός τε βούλεται κἀγὼ τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτοῦ σαφῶς ἐξεπιστάμενος παραινῶ, οὐκ ἂν ὄντες μακαριστοὶ καὶ ζηλωτοὶ πᾶσιν ἀτυχήσαιτέ ποτʼ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.10c. AD 100

λαμβάνει δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν τριῶν δογμάτων γνῶσιν Δαυείδ καὶ λέγει: Μακάριος ἀνήρ, ὃς οὐκ ἐπορεύθη ἐν βουλῇ ἀσεβῶν, καθὼς καὶ οἱ ἰχθύες πορεύονται ἐν σκότει εἰς τὰ βάθη: καὶ ἐν ὁδῷ ἁμαρτωλῶν οὐκ ἔστη, καθὼς οἱ δοκοῦντες φοβεῖσθαι τὸν κύριον ἁμαρτάνουσιν…

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἐπὶepi in G1909 Preposition
886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.
Tyndale gloss
upon/to/against
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
τῷho the G3588 Article · dative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSN — Article · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ὁμοιώματιhomoiōma likeness G3667 Noun · dative · singular · neuter
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to a likeness or resemblance, either a physical image or an abstract similarity. It is used in Romans 5:14 and Revelation 9:7 to describe something that is made like something else. It can also describe a similarity in nature or character.
Tyndale gloss
likeness
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὁμοίωμα (i.e., *homoiōma*) means likeness or resemblance, derived from the verb ὁμοιόω. It encompasses both concrete forms, such as images, and abstract concepts of similarity. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like Romans 1:23 and Philippians 2:7, where it refers to likenesses or representations. Some sources note a distinction between ὁμοίωμα and related terms like εἰκών, emphasizing different nuances in their meanings.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — εἰκών, ὁμοίωσις, ὁμοίωμα from a scan

THERE is a twofold theological interest attending the distinction between εἰκών and the two words which are here brought into comparison with it; the first belonging to the Arian controversy, and turning on the fitness or unfitness of the words before us to set forth the relation of the Son to the Father ; while the other is an interest that, seeming at first sight remote from any controversy, has yet contrived to insinuate itself into more than one, namely, whether there be a distinction, and if so, what it is, between the ‘image’ (εἰκών) of God, 7m which, and the ‘ likeness’ (ὁμοίωσις) of God, after which, man was created at the beginning (Gen. i. 26). I need hardly remind those who will care to read this volume of the distinction drawn between the words during the course of the long Arian debate. Some there may be who are not acquainted with Lightfoot’s note on Col. i. 15 in his…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁμοίωμα, -τος, τό

(< ὁμοιόω),

[in LXX for דְּמוּת, תַּבְנִית, תְּמוּנָה, etc.;]

that which is made like something;

concrete, an image, likeness (Ps 105 (106):20, Ez 1:5, I Mac 3:48, al.): Re 9:7;

abstract, likeness, resemblance: Ro 5:14 6:5 8:3, Phl 2:7; ἐν ὁ. εἰκόνος, Ro 1:23.†

SYN.: εἰκών (q.v.), ὁμοίωσις.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁμοίωμα, -ros, τό, (ὁμοιόω), Sept. for 773A, N24, Dos, 32; prop. that which has been made after the likeness of something, hence a. a figure, image, likeness, representation: Ps. ον. (cvi.) 20; 1 Mace. iii. 48; of the image or shape of things seen in a vision, Rev. ix. 7 [ef. W. 604 (562) ] (Ezek. i. 5, 26, 28,ete. Plato, in Parmen. Ρ- 132 d., calls finite things ὁμοιώματα, likenesses as it were, in which τὰ παραδείγματα, i.e. ai ἰδέαι or τὰ εἴδη, are expressed). b. likeness i. e. resemblance (inasmuch as that appears in an image or figure), freq. such as amounts well-nigh to equality or identity: τινός, Ro. vi. 5; viii. 3 (on which see σάρξ, 3 fin. [ef. Weiss, BibL Theol. etc. 88 69 ¢. note, 78 c. note}); Phil. ii. 7 (see μορφή); εἰκόνος, a likeness expressed by an image, i. 6. an image like, Ro. i. 23; ἐπὶ τῷ ὁμοιώματι τῆς παραβάσεως ᾿Αδάμ, in the same manner in which Adam…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὁμοίωμα. According to Souter Zex. s.v. ὁμοίωμα, ‘‘a thing made like” something else (concrete), differs from ὁμοιότης, “‘resemblance” (abstract), much as szmz/acrum differs from similitudo. As distinguished from εἰκών, which implies an archetype, the ‘‘likeness” or ‘‘form’’ in ὁμοίωμα may be accidental, as one egg is like another: cf. Rom 54, Phil 27, and see Trench Syz. p. 47 ff. The word is found in a difficult context in OG/S 669% (i/A.D.) Kal viv τοῖς αὐτοῖς παραγγέλλω μηδὲν ἐξ ὁμοιώμαϊτος ἐπι]γράφειν ἀλ[λ]αχῆι ἄλλο τι τῶν καθόλου χωρὶς τοῦ κρεῖναι τὸν ἔπαρχον.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁμοίωμα (homoiōma) — likeness.

ὁμοί-ωμα, ατος, τό,

likeness, image, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐξ ὁμοιώματος in accordance with the practice in similar cases, by analogy, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁμοίωμα

homoioma

from 3666; a form; abstractly, resemblance:--made like to, likeness,

shape, similitude.

see GREEK for 3666

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁμοίωμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

a likeness, form, similitude

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁμοίωμα homoiōma 6x

pr. that which is conformed or assimilated; form, shape, figure, Rev. 9:7; likeness, resemblance, similitude, Rom. 1:23; 5:14; 6:5; 8:3; Phil. 2:7*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁμοίωμα ὁμοίωμα, ατος, τό, a likeness, image, resemblance, counterfeit, Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
83%likeness
likeness83% · 5×appearance17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial67%predicate17%subject17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
θεόςGod, a godπέμπωI sendλαμβάνωI receive, take
Article the
ἐπίγίνομαιI come into beinκαίand, even, also,
ὁμοίωμαlikeness
what comes after →
Article the
παράβασιςa transgressionθάνατοςdeathἀκρίςa locust
εἰκώνan image, likeness,
φθαρτόςcorruptible, per
σάρξflesh, body
ἁμαρτίαa sin
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
γίνομαιI come into bein

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁμοίωμα · 6× in the New Testament
Romans Philippians Revelation
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 27 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Migration of Abraham 48c. AD 40

„φωνὴν ῥημάτων ὑμεῖς ἠκούσατε, καὶ ὁμοίωμα οὐκ εἴδετε ἀλλ’ ἢ φωνήν“ (Deut.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.195c. AD 75–95

καὶ πρὸ τούτων δὲ ἁμαρτεῖν αὐτὸν ἔτυχε καὶ σφαλῆναι περὶ τὴν φυλακὴν τῶν νομίμων, ὅτε τὰ τῶν χαλκῶν βοῶν ὁμοιώματα κατεσκεύασε τῶν ὑπὸ τῇ θαλάττῃ τῷ ἀναθήματι καὶ τῶν λεόντων τῶν περὶ τὸν θρόνον τὸν ἴδιον·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 9.1.9c. AD 140

οὐ μόνον, φησίν, μοιχεία ἐστίν, ἐάν τις τὴν σάρκα αὐτοῦ μιάνῃ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὃς ἂν τὰ ὁμοιώματα ποιῇ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν, μοιχᾶται.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Fay. 106Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 139–AD 142

χρείας ὅπως δυνηθῶ ἐμαυτὸν ἀνακτήσασθαι ἀπὸ τῶν καμάτων οὐδὲν δὲ δεῖ … τον καὶ ὁμοιώματα ὑποτάξαι, ὅτι τέλεον ἀπολύονται τῶν λειτουργιῶν οἱ τὴν ἰατρικὴν ἐπιστήμην μεταχειριζόμενοι μάλιστα δὲ οἱ

O.Mich. 3 1101Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 101–AD 300

ἀρχαῖα βυβλία καὶ ὁμοιώματα μηδὲ διαβεβλημένων

P.Oxy. 82 5321Alexandria (?)AD 201–AD 300

ὡς κακῶς αὐτὸν εἰσαγγείλας. ὅταν οὖν δοκῇ ὑμῖν, ἐπιστείλατέ μοι καὶ διαπέμπομαι ὑμῖν τὰ ὁμοιώματα. ἓν δὲ καὶ τοῦτο ὑμᾶς ὑπομιμνήσκω, ὅτι χρόνος τοσοῦτος διελήλυθεν … ασις ὑμῖν

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
τῆςho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
παραβάσεωςparabasis transgression G3847 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A transgression is a violation or overstepping of a law or rule, as seen in Romans 4:15 and Hebrews 2:2. It involves going against what is right or expected.
Amplified meaning
disobeyed, rebelled against God's will
Tyndale gloss
transgression
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παράβασις refers to a deviation or transgression, derived from the verb παραβαίνω. It encompasses meanings like 'going aside' and 'overstepping,' particularly in a legal or moral context, as seen in Romans and Galatians. The term is used to describe violations of the law, including the Mosaic law. Notably, it is associated with the concept of sin, but it specifically denotes a breach of established rules.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ἁμαρτία, ἁμάρτημα, παρακοή, ἀνομία, παρανομία, παράβασις, παράπτωμα, ἀγνόημα, ἥττημα from a scan

παράβασις, παράπτωμα, ἀγνόημα, ἥττημα. A MOURNFULLY numerous group of words, and one which it would be only too easy to make larger still. Nor is it hard to see why. For sin, which we may define in the 240 SYNONYMS OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. ϑιυχνι. language of Augustine, as ‘ factum vel dictuin yel concuvitum aliquid contra eternam legem’ (Con. Faust. xxii. 27; cf. the Stoic definition, ἁμάρτημα, νόμου ἀπαγόρευμα, Plutarch, De Rep. Stoic. 11); or again, ‘ voluntas admittendi vel retinendi quod justitia vetat, et unde liberum est abstinere’ (Con. Jul. i. 47), may be regarded under an infinite number of aspects, and in all languages has been so regarded; and as the diagnosis of it belongs most of all to the Scriptures, nowhere else are we likely to find it contemplated on so many sides, set forth under such various images. It may be regarded as the missing of a mark or aim; it is then ἁμαρτία…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρά-βασις, -εως, ἡ

(< παραβαίνω),

[in LXX: Ps 100 (101):3 (סֵטִים), IV Ki 2:24 A, Wi 14:31, II Mac 15:10*;]

a going aside, a deviation (Arist.).

In later writers, an overstepping; metaph., transgression (Plut., al.): Ro 4:15 5:14, He 2:2 9:15; τ. νόμου, Ro 2:23; ἐν π., I Ti 2:14; τ. παραβάσεων χάριν, Ga 3:19.

SYN.: v.s. ἁμαρτία.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρά-βασις, -ews. 9, (παραβαίνω, q. V.), prop. @ going over; metaph. a disregarding, violating ; Vulg. praevaricatio, and once (Gal. iii. 19) transgressio ; [A. V. transgression]: w.a gen. of the object, τῶν ὅρκων, 2 Mace. xv. 10; τῶν δικαίων, Plut.compar. Ages. and Pomp.1; τοῦ νόμου, of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 23 (Joseph. antt. 18, 8,2); absolutely, the breach of a definite, promulgated, ratified law: Ro. v. 14; 1 Tim. ii. 14, (but ἁμαρτία is wrong-doing which even a man ignorant of the law may be guilty of [ef. Trench, N. T. Syn. § lxvi.]) ; τῶν παραβ. χάριν. to create transgressions, i.e. that sins might take on the character of transgressions, and thereby the consciousness of sin be intensified and the desire for redemption be aroused, Gal. iii. 19 ; used of the transgression of the Mosaic law, Ro. iv. 15; Heb. ii. 2; ix. 15; Ps. e. (ci.) 3; w. agen. of the subj., τῶν ἀδίκων, Sap.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

παράβασις. P Flor IIT. 313!° (A.D. 449) ἀπὸ καταγνώσεως καὶ παραβάσεως. P lond 1015! (vi/a.D.)(=III. p. 257) προστίμου καὶ παραβάσεως.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παράβασις (parabasis) — transgression.

παρά-βᾰσις,

Epic dialect παραίβ-, εως, ἡ, going aside, escape, παραίβασις ἔσσετ᾽ ὀλέθρου [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; deviation, variant in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; digression, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. of the action of walking, π. καὶ παράλλαξις σκελῶν [Refs 1st c.AD+]

3. transition, passage, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. overstepping, ὅρων [Refs 1st c.BC+]: absolutely, transgression, [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]; error, illusion, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; compare παραβασία.

III. parabasis, a part of the Old Comedy, in which the Chorus came forward (compare παραβαίνω IV) and addressed the audience in the Poet's name, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

παράβασις

parabasis

from 3845; violation:--breaking, transgression.

see GREEK for 3845

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παράβασις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

a transgression

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παράβασις parabasis 7x

a stepping by the side, deviation; a transgression, violation of law, Rom. 2:23; 4:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παράβασις a going aside, deviation, Arist.

an overstepping, τῶν δικαίων Plut.:—absol. a transgression, id. Plut.

the parabasis, a part of the old Comedy, in which the chorus came forward and addressed the audience in the Poet's name.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

trans-gresh'-un: From "transgress," to pass over or beyond; to overpass, as any rule prescribed as the limit of duty; to break or violate, as a law, civil or moral; the act of transgressing; the violation of a law or known principle of rectitude; breach of command; offense; crime; sin. In the Old Testament pesha`, occurs 80 times, rendered in all versions by "transgression." Its meaning is "rebellion"; see REBELLION. The word "rebellion" differs from this word in that it may be in the heart, though no opportunity should be granted for its manifestation: "An evil man seeketh only rebellion" (Pr 17:11). Here the wise man contemplates an evil heart, looking for an excuse or opportunity to rebel.

The New Testament uses parabasis, "trespass": "The law .... was added because of transgressions" (

Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Special Laws 2.242c. AD 40

χρὴ δὲ καὶ τὰς ὁρισθείσας ἐπὶ τῇ τούτων παραβάσει τιμωρίας δηλῶσαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.322c. AD 75–95

Μωυσῆς δὲ ταύτῃ τοὺς Ἑβραίους ἀπήγαγεν, ἵνʼ εἰ μετανοήσαντες οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι διώκειν ἐθέλοιεν τιμωρίαν τῆς πονηρίας καὶ παραβάσεως τῶν ὡμολογημένων ὑπόσχοιεν, καὶ διὰ Παλαιστίνους, οὓς δυσμενῶς ἔχοντας κατὰ παλαιὰν ἀπέχθειαν οὖσαν ὁπωσοῦν ἐβούλετο…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 12.5c. AD 100

πάλιν Μωϋσῆς ποιεῖ τύπον τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ὅτι δεῖ αὐτὸν παθεῖν, καὶ αὐτὸς ζωοποιήσει, ὃν δόξουσιν ἀπολωλεκέναι, ἐν σημείῳ πίπτοντος τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, ʽἐποίησεν γὰρ κύριος πάντα ὄφιν δάκνειν αὐτούς, καὶ ἀπέθνησκον ἐπειδὴ ἡ παράβασις διὰ τοῦ ὄφεως ἐν Εὔᾳ ἐγένετὀ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Flor. 3 313Epoikion Iliu (Hermopolites)AD 449

μηκέτι με ἐπιζητεῖν … … … … τὰ ἐνέχυρα καὶ δώσειν ἀπὸ καταγνώσεως καὶ παραβάσεως χρυσοῦ νομισμάτιον ἕν , καὶ μηδὲν διεψεῦσθαι. ἡ ὁμολογία κυρία καὶ βεβαία, καὶ ἐπερωτηθεῖσα

P.Gen. 4 186HermopolisAD 473–AD 490

τις ἐξ ἡμῶν, παρέξει τὸ μὴ ἐμμένον μέρος τῷ ἐμμένοντι μέρει λόγῳ προστίμου καὶ παραβάσεως χρυσοῦ οὐγκίαν μίαν μετὰ καὶ τοῦ οὐδὲν ἧττον ἀρραγῆ καὶ ἀσάλευτον εἶναί τε καὶ

P.Cair. Masp. 3 67299AntinoopolisAD 527–AD 565

μὲν ὤνασθαι ἐκ τοῦ ἐπιχειρήματος, δώσειν δὲ τῷ ἐμμένοντι μέρει ὑπὲρ μόνου τοῦ τῆς παραβάσεως ἐγχειρήματος, ἐκ συμφώνου καὶ ἐπερωτήσεως, λόγῳ προστίμου καὶ ποινῆς, ἔργῳ καὶ δυνάμει ἀπαιτούμενα, χρυσοῦ

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἈδὰμAdam of Adam G76 Noun · proper name, indeclinable
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Adam, the first man created by God, is what this word represents. It is also used to symbolize Jesus as the representative of humanity.
Tyndale gloss
Adam
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἀδάμ (transliterated as *Adám*) is an indeclinable proper noun referring to Adam, the first man in biblical tradition. It appears in several New Testament passages, where it is often contrasted with Christ as the 'last Adam.' The entries indicate that it can represent both the historical figure and, in a theological context, humanity as a whole.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἀδάμ, ὁ indecl. (Heb. אָדָם),

Adam: Lk 3:38, Ro 5:14, I Co 15:22, 45, I Ti 2:13, 14 Ju 14. Christ ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀ., I Co 15:45.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

᾿Αδάμ, indecl. prop. name (but in Joseph.” Aéapos, -ov), DW (i. 6. ace. to Philo, de leg. alleg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62 ed. Mang., γήϊνος ; ace. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 γηγενής ; ace. to Joseph. antt. 1, 1, 2 πυρρός, with which Gesenius agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first man and the parent of the whole human race: Lk. iii. 38 ; Ro. v.14; 1 Co. xv. 22, 45; 1 Tim. ii. 13 sq.; Jude 14. In accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the former Adam (}1W877 D1), the first man, the author of ‘all our woe,’ and the latter Adam (}}7n87 078), the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ is called ὁ ἔσχατος ᾿Αδάμ (see ἔσχατος, 1) and contrasted with ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος ; Ro. v. 14 6 μέλλων se. ᾿Αδάμ. [2. one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33 WH mrg. (cf. ’Adpeiv).]

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἀδάμ (Adam) — Adam.

Ἀδάμ, ὁ indecl. (Heb. אָדָם),

Adam: Luk.3:38, Rom.5:14, 1Co.15:22,45, 1Ti.2:13,14 Ju 14. Christ ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀ., 1Co.15:45.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἀδάμ

Adam

of Hebrew origin (121); Adam, the first man; typically (of Jesus) man

(as his representative):--Adam.

see HEBREW for 0121

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἀδάμ, ὁ

Prop.n.

Adam

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἀδάμ Adam 9x

Adam, pr. name, indecl.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-PRI — Noun · proper name, indeclinable
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-PRI Indeclinable PRoper Noun

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Adam

Red, a Babylonian word, the generic name for man, having the same meaning in the Hebrew and the Assyrian languages. It was the name given to the first man, whose creation, fall, and subsequent history and that of his descendants are detailed in the first book of Moses (Gen. 1:27-ch. 5). “God created man [Heb., Adam] in his own image, in the image of God created he him; male and female created he them.”

Adam was absolutely the first man whom God created. He was formed out of the dust of the earth (and hence his name), and God breathed into his nostrils the breath of life, and gave him dominion over all the lower creatures (Gen. 1:26; 2:7). He was placed after his creation in the Garden of Eden, to cultivate it, and to enjoy its fruits under this one prohibition: “Of the tree…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

a city on the Jordan, "beside Zaretan," in the time of Joshua. (Joshua 3:16)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

1. The progenitor and representative head of our race; formed of the dust of the ground, and made a living soul by the Creator’s breath. He was the last work of the creation, and received dominion over all that the earth contained. That he might not be alone, God provided Eve as a helpmeet for him, and she became his wife. Marriage is thus a divine institution, first in order of time, as well as of importance and blessedness to mankind. Adam was made a perfect man-complete in every physical, mental, and spiritual endowment; and placed in the Garden of Eden on probation, holy and happy, but liable to sin. From this estate he fell by breaking the express command of God, through the temptations of Satan and the compliance of Eve; and thus brought the curse upon himself and all his posterity. Sovereign grace interposed; a Savior was revealed, and the full execution of the curse stayed; but…

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

earthy; red

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%adam
adam100% · 9×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject56%adverbial33%predicate11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ΣήθPropἐν
ἀπό
θάνατοςdeathἕβδομοςseventh
παράβασιςa transgression
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
πρῶτοςfirst, before
ἔσχατοςlast, at the last, f
Article the
Ἀδάμof Adam
what comes after →
εἰς
ψυχήthe soul, life, πνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
Article the
θεόςGod, a god
μέχριas far as, until
ΜωϋσῆςMoses
ὅς
εἰμίI am, exist
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am a

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceἈδάμ · 9× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians 1 Timothy Romans Jude Luke
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 24 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 149c. AD 40

φησὶν οὖν ὅτι πάντα τὰ ζῷα ἤγαγεν ὁ θεὸς πρὸς τὸν Ἀδάμ, ἰδεῖν βουλόμενος τίνας θήσεται προσρήσεις ἑκάστοις, οὐχ ὅτι ἐνεδοίαζεν — ἄγνωστον γὰρ οὐδὲν θεῷ —, ἀλλ’ ὅτι ᾔδει τὴν λογικὴν ἐν θνητῷ φύσιν κατεσκευακὼς αὐτοκίνητον, ὅπως ἀμέτοχος αὐτὸς ᾖ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.9c. AD 100

ἄνθρωπος γὰρ γῆ ἐστιν πάσχουσα: ἀπὸ προσώπου γὰρ τῆς γῆς ἡ πλάσις τοῦ Ἀδὰμ ἐγένετο.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 6.3c. AD 96

ζῆλος ἀπηλλοτρίωσεν γαμετὰς ἀνδρῶν καὶ ἠλλοίωσεν τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀδάμ: Τοῦτο νῦν ὀστοῦν ἐκ τῶν ὀστέων μου καὶ σὰρξ ἐκ τῆς σαρκός μου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Rain.Unterricht 32Herakleopolites (?)AD 201–AD 400

r ονος Ἀδάμ … κτήματος ὀνόματος Παησίου ἄλλων οικεθ ονος ἀνέντος Πέτρου α … αμμοι κυρ μου

O.Douch 5 542Kysis (Oasis Magna)AD 301–AD 425

Ἀννουμέρις Ἀλεξάνδρῳ γεωργῷ χαίρειν. δὸς τῷ ἀδελφῷ Ἀδὰμ χόρτου πρασιὰν μίαν γίνεται χόρτου πρασιὰ α ε ἰνδικτίωνος. ἐρρῶσθαι.

P.Mich. 15 745AD 501–AD 700

μηχανὴ Ἀπιᾶ Ἰσὰκ Ἰωάννου Κολλασίμου Πρήου Φοιβάμμωνος Κληλὼ Θεοφίλου Ἰακῶβ μηχανὴ Ἀδάμ Μουσαῖος Ἰσὰκ πρεσβύτερος … ρουδα υἱός Ταρηουδα υἱός μηχανὴ Πη … ου Ἀποῦ πρεσβύτερος

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ὅςhos, hē who G3739 Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-NSM — Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-NSM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwho1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
ἐστινeimi is G1510 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%is
is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς
οὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
εἰμίis2457×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegγάρfor
ἐν
Article theσύαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐγώ
εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
τύποςtupos a type G5179 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
15× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Romans than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A mark or example, like a stamp or statue, as in Romans 6:17 and Acts 7:43 where it refers to a model or pattern.
Amplified meaning
a figure, a model
Tyndale gloss
mark/example
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τύπος is derived from the verb τύπτω and generally refers to a mark or impression made by a blow. It encompasses meanings such as a figure, model, or example, and is used in both ethical and doctrinal contexts in the New Testament. Notably, it can signify a type or foreshadowing of future events or persons, as seen in Romans 5:14. The lexicons agree on its broad application, but specific nuances may vary.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τύπος, -ου, ὁ

(< τύπτω),

[in LXX: Ex 25:39 (40) (תַּבְנִית), Am 5:26 (צֶלֶם), III Mac 3:30, IV Mac 6:19 * ;]

the mark of a blow: τῶν ἥλων, Jo 20:25.

An impression, impress, the stamp made by a die; hence, a figure, image: Ac 7:43 (LXX).

form (Plat.): Ro 6:17; the sense or substance of a letter (III Mac, l.c.), Ac 23:25.

an example, pattern: Ac 7:44, He 8:6 (LXX); in ethical sense, Phl 3:17, I Th 1:7, II Th 3:9, I Ti 4:12,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τύπος, -ov, ὁ, (τύπτω). fr. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down; 2 Τύριος 1. the mark of a stroke or blow; print: τῶν ἥλων, Jn. xx. 25%, 25” [where LT Trmrg. τόπον], (Athen. 13 p. 585 ο. Tous τύπους τῶν πληγῶν ἰδοῦσα). 2. a figure formed hy a blow or impression; hence univ. a figure, image: of the images of the gods, Acts vii. 43 (Amos v. 26; Joseph. antt. 1, 19,11; 15, 9,5). (Cf. κύριοι τύπος θεοῦ, Barn. ep. 19, 7; ‘ Teaching’ 4, 11.] 3. form: διδαxis, i. e. the teaching which embodies the sum and substance of religion and represents it to the mind, Ro. vi. 17; i. q. manner of writing, the contents and form of a letter, Acts xxiii. 25 (3 Mace. iii. 30). 4. an example ; a. in the technical sense, viz. the pattern in conformity to which a thing must be made: Acts vii. 445 Heb. viii. 5, (Ex. xxv. 40). B. in an ethical sense, a dissuasive example, pattern of warning: plur. of ruinous events which…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τύπος, from meaning originally the ‘‘mark” of a blow (cf. Jn 2075), came to denote the “stamp” or the “figure” which a stamp bears, and hence ‘‘ pattern,” ‘* model,”’ and finally ‘‘type” in the Biblical sense of a person or event prefiguring someone or something in the future (cf. Zz V. vi. p. 377 ff.). The word has equally varied meanings in the papyri. The following may serve as illustrations—ἔ (1) “pattern”: P Tebt II. 34275 (late ii/a.p.) κοῦφα ἀρεστὰ τύπῳ TH προκί(ειμένῳ), pots in good order of the aforesaid pattern,” and P Lond 112248 (ς. a.p. 254-268) (Ξ: 11. p. 211, P Flor 11. 187*) τὸν τύπον τὸν τοῦ ἐλαιουργοῦ π[α]ράδος, if the word is read correctly (see the editor's note). Ἵ See also P Lond 19178 (c. A.D. 330-340) ὅπως ἐφάρῃς τὰς Xipds σίου πρὸς τὸν δεσπότην θαιὸν ὡς τοίπως (1. τύπος) σταυρῶ, “that you may lift up your hands to our Master God, in the semblance of a cross’’…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τύπος (tupos) — mark/example.

τύπ-ος [ῠ], ὁ,

(τύπτω) blow, τ. ἀντίτυπος Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; beat of horses' hoofs, variant for{κτὺπος} in [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. the effect of a blow or of pressure:

II.1. impression of a seal, τύποι σφενδόνης χρυσηλάτου [Refs 5th c.BC+]; stamp on a coin, τὰ ἀκριβῆ τὸν τ. [Refs 2nd c.BC+] “*Mens.” 60, [Refs 5th c.AD+] see entry {Κυζικηνοι στατῆρες}; on a branding-iron, ὄ τ. τοῦ καυτῆρος ἔστω ἀλώπηξ ἢ πίθηκος [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: generally, print, impression, χύτρας τύπον ἀρθείσης ἐν σποδῷ μὴ ἀπολιπεῖν, ἀλλὰ συγχεῖν [Refs 1st c.AD+]; στίβου γ᾽ οὐδεὶς τ. no footprint, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡς ἡδὺς ἐν πόρπακι σὸς (i.e. τοῦ βραχίονος) κεῖται τύπος thy imprint, (O arm), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. ὀδόντων imprint of teeth, [Refs]; print, βάλω τὸν δάκτυλόν μου εἰς τὸν τ. τῶν ἥλων [NT+2nd…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τύπος

tupos

from 5180; a die (as struck), i.e. (by implication) a stamp or scar;

by analogy, a shape, i.e. a statue, (figuratively) style or

resemblance; specially, a sampler ("type"), i.e. a model (for

imitation) or instance (for warning):--en-(ex-)ample, fashion, figure,

form, manner, pattern, print.

see GREEK for 5180

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τύπος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a figure, model, type

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τυπικῶς typikōs 1x

figuratively, typically, 1 Cor. 10:11*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τύπος τύ^πος, ὁ, τύπτω a blow, Orac. ap. Hdt.

the effect of a blow, the print or impress of a seal, Eur.; στίβου τύπος the print of a footstep, Soph.:— τύποι marks, letters, Plat.:— ὁ τ. τῶν ἵππων the sound of their tread, Xen.

anything wrought of metal or stone, in pl. figures worked in relief, Hdt., Eur.:—then, simply, a figure, image, statue, Hdt., Eur.

τύπος τινός a man's form, i. e. himself, Ἱππομέδοντος τ. Aesch.; βραχιόνων τ. ῀ βραχίονες, Eur.

general form or character, the type or model of a thing, Plat.:— an example, NTest.

an outline, sketch, draught, Plat.; so, τύπῳ, ἐν τύπῳ in outline, in general, id. Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

tip:

1. Definition of Type

2. Distinctive Features

3. Classification of Types

4. How Much of the Old Testament Is Typical?

LITERATURE

The Bible furnishes abundant evidence of the presence of types and of typical instruction in the Sacred Word. The New Testament attests this fact. It takes up a large number of persons and things and events of former dispensations, and it treats them as adumbrations and prophecies of the future. A generation ago a widespread interest in the study of typology prevailed; latterly the interest has largely subsided, chiefly because of the vagaries and extravagances which attended its treatment on the part of not a few writers. Pressing the typical teaching of Scripture so far as to imperil the historical validity of God's word is both dangerous and certain to be followed by reaction and neglect of the subject.

1. Definition of Type:

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Type

Occurs only once in Scripture (1 Cor. 10:11, A.V. marg.). The Greek word tupos is rendered “print” (John 20:25), “figure” (Acts 7:43; Rom. 5:14), “fashion” (Acts 7:44), “manner” (Acts 23:25), “form” (Rom. 6:17), “example” or “ensample” (1 Cor. 10:6, 11; Phil. 3:17; 1 Thess. 1:7; 2 Thess. 3:9;

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

In Greek tupos, a word denoting some resemblance, and translated "figure" in Ro 4:15, "ensample" in Php 3:17, "manner" in Ac 23:25, and "form" in Ro 6:17. So also Moses was to make the tabernacle according to the type or model he had seen in the mount, Ac 7:44. In the more general use of the word, a scriptural type is a prophetic symbol, "a shadow of good things to come," Heb 10:1, "but the body is Christ," Col 2:17. The typical character of the old dispensation is its most distinguishing feature. For Example, the…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%pattern
pattern33% · 5×example13% · 2×mark13% · 2×images7% · 1×form7% · 1×type7% · 1×the form7% · 1×types7% · 1×other renderings7% · 1×

15 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate33%object27%adverbial20%second object20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 15 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
κατάαὐτόςῬαιφάνProp
δέbut, on the other ha
οὗτος
ἀλλάbut, except
καταφρονέωI despise, scornκλῆροςa lot, portion
εἰμίI am, exist
ὅς
παραδίδωμιI hand over, deliver
ὅς
τύποςa type15×
what comes after →
Article the
ἧλοςa nailμέλλωI am about toδείκνυμιI point out, sho
ὅς
ποιέωI do, makeὁράωI see, look upon
ἐγώ
γίνομαιI come into bein
γίνομαιI come into being, a
Article the
οὗτος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτύπος · 15× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy 2 Thessalonians Hebrews John Philippians Titus
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 18c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὥσπερ ἐν κηρῷ τῇ ἑαυτοῦ ψυχῇ τοὺς ἑκάστων δεξάμενος τύπους ἀγαλματοφορεῖ νοητὴν πόλιν, ἧς ἀνακινήσας τὰ εἴδωλα μνήμῃ τῇ συμφύτῳ καὶ τοὺς χαρακτῆρας ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐνσφραγισάμενος, οἷα δημιουργὸς ἀγαθός, ἀποβλέπων εἰς τὸ παράδειγμα τὴν ἐκ λίθων καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.129c. AD 75–95

οὐ γὰρ ἐπιχώριος ἡμῖν ὁ τοιοῦτος αὐτῶν τύπος, ἀλλʼ ἕν τε αὐτῶν σχῆμα καὶ τελευτὴ μία, Νῶχός τέ τοι Νῶε καλεῖται καὶ τοῦτον τὸν τύπον ἐπὶ παντὸς τηρεῖ σχήματος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.11c. AD 100

ἐπεὶ οὖν ἀνακαινίσας ἡμᾶς ἐν τῇ ἀφέσει τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν, ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς ἄλλον τύπον, ὡς παιδίων ἔχειν τὴν ψυχήν, ὡς ἂν δὴ ἀναπλάσσοντος αὐτοῦ ἡμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 5th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Brem. 51Hermopolis (?)AD 113–AD 120

συνήλιξα ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ χειρόγραφα τὸ μὲν Εὐδαίμονος Ἀπολλωνίου δραχμὰς Αφκη, τὸ δὲ ἕτερον τύπον ἔχον ἐπιθήκης δραχμὰς Βρξγ. δώσεις Παυσᾶτι Ἀλιοῦτος ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐμοῦ λόγου δραχμὰς τρισχιλίας λαβὼν

CdÉ 77 (2002), p. 227-229 no. 11Narmuthis (Arsinoites)AD 101–AD 300

Ζηνοδώρου ἐλαιουργὸς Γεμέλλου Μύρου ἐπὶ τὸ Πετεσούχου ἄγραφον εἶδος τοῦ ἑνὸς καὶ ἑκάστου ἐγκλήματος τύπους ἐκλεκτικὰ κατὰ στρατηγοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 210-211 no. 1122 bTheadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 249–AD 268

Ἡρακλείδης Ἡρωνείνῳ τῶι πατρὶ χαίρειν. τὸν τύπον τὸν τοῦ ἐλαιουργοῦ παράδος Ἀμεσύσῳ τῷ βαδιστηλάτῃ συντιμήσας αὐτὸν καὶ ὁρίσας τὴν τιμὴν εἰς

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Nevertheless reigned <the> death from Adam until Moses even over those not having sinned in the likeness of the transgression of Adam who is a type of the coming [One].
μέλλοντος.mellō coming [One]. G3195 Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
110× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Romans as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To ensue means to be about to happen or to intend to do something, like when Jesus was about to suffer in Matthew 2:13. It involves a sense of purpose or duty. The Bible uses this concept to describe events that are going to occur, like in Acts 3:3 and Hebrews 8:5.
Amplified meaning
the future Messiah, Jesus Christ
Tyndale gloss
to ensue
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

μέλλω is a verb meaning to be about to do something, indicating intention or future action. It can express necessity, probability, or mere intention, often followed by an infinitive. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts suggesting both planned actions and events that are destined to occur, such as in Matthew 2:13 and Acts 12:6. The participle form ὁ μέλλων refers to future things.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μέλλω,

[in LXX: Jb 3:8 (עָתִיד) 19:25 (אַחֲרוֹן); elsewhere for fut., and freq. in Wi, II, IV Mac;]

to be about to be or do;

c. inf. (Bl., § 62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114);

of intending or being about to do of one's own free will: c. inf. praes., Mt 2:13, Lk 10:1, Ac 3:3 5:35, He 8:5, II Pe 1:12 (Field, Notes, 240), al.; c. inf. aor. (Bl., § 58, 3), Ac 12:6, Re 3:16;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μέλλω ; fut. μελλήσω (Mt. xxiv. 6; and LTTrWH in 2 Pet. i. 12); impf. ἔμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. ix. 31 (exc. T WH); Jn. vi. 6, 71 (exc. RG) ; vii. 39 (exe. T); xi. 51 (exc. L Tr); Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 (where R pres.); x. 4 (exe. L Tr)] and ἤμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. vil. 2; x. 1 (exe. RG); xix. 4; Jn. iv. 47; xii. 33; xviii. 32; Acts xii. 6 (exc. RGL); xvi. 27 (exe. RG); xxvii 33 (exe. RGT); Heb. xi. 8 (exe. L); ef. reff. s. v. βούλομαι, init. and Rutherford’s note on Babrius 7, 15], to be about to do anything; so 1. the ptep., ὁ μέλλων, absol.: τὰ μέλλοντα and τὰ ἐνεστῶτα are contrasted, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; εἰς τὸ μέλλον, for the future, hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but see eis, A. II. 2 (where Grimm supplies éros)]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; τὰ μέλλοντα, things future, things to come, i. e., ace. to the context, the more perfect state of things which will exist in the αἰὼν μέλλων…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μέλλω. In the NT μέλλω is construed 84 times with the pres. cf. P Par 432 (B.C. 154) μέλλω δὲ ἰσάγειν ἐν τῷ μεσορὴ μηνί, 75. 4819. (B.c. 153) καταπλεῖν μέλλομεν πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα, P Meyer 209 (1st half iii/A.D.) μέλλι πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἔρχεσθαι, pe σοι ἀεὶ γράφειν, Ὁ ae 11. 416° (iii/ A.D.) μέλλω péve εἰς ᾿Αντινόου, and P Oxy VIII. 11567° (iii/A.p.) μέλλο[με]ν χόρτου χρίαν ἔχιν. For the constr. with the fut. inf., which is obsolete in the NT (cf. TR Ac 233°), cf. Syi/ 432! (B.c. 326-5) ὀμόσασιν. . . [ποιήσεσθαι τὴν] ἐπιτροπὴν καθ᾽ ὅτι ἂν μέλλει ἔσ[εϊσθαι κτλ. Μέλλω followed by the aor. inf. act. is seen in such passages as P Giss I. 125 (ii/A.p.) ὁσάκις ἐὰν μέλλῃς πέμψαι, P Oxy XII. 14$82° (ii/a.p.) ἔμελλον yap ἀνελθεῖν, and 26. VII. 106727 (iii/A.D.) εἰ μέλλεις ἐλθεῖν ἐλθέ, ‘come if you are coming,” and by the aor. inf. pass. in P Goodsp Cairo 310 (iii/B.c.) ἡνίκα fiehioy κοιμηθῆναι ἔγραψα…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέλλω (mellō) — to ensue.

μέλλω,

imperfect ἔμελλον and ἤμελλον (see. below), Epic dialect μέλλον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect, Ionic dialect μέλλεσκον [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: future μελλήσω [NT+4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐμέλλησα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive and middle, see below see.—Only present and imperfect in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Lyric poetry, and Trag.: aorist only in Prose (except [Refs 6th c.BC+]imperfect ἤμελλον with long augment is established by the metre in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἠμέλλησα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἤμελλον is not found in earlier Attic dialect Inscrr., but occurs in Papyrus, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. to be destined or likely to, indicating an estimated certainty or strong probability in the present, past, or future (cf. Aristonic. cited in [Refs 8th c.BC+]present infinitive (or its…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μέλλω

mello

a strengthened form of 3199 (through the idea of expectation); to

intend, i.e. be about to be, do, or suffer something (of persons or

things, especially events; in the sense of purpose, duty, necessity,

probability, possibility, or hesitation):--about, after that, be

(almost), (that which is, things, + which was for) to come, intend,

was to (be), mean, mind, be at the point, (be) ready, + return, shall

(begin), (which, that) should (after, afterwards, hereafter) tarry,

which was for, will, would, be yet.

see GREEK for 3199

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μέλλω

v.

I am about to

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μέλλω mellō 109x

to be about to, be on the point of, Mt. 2:13; Jn. 4:47; it serves to express in general a settled futurity, Mt. 11:14; Lk. 9:31; Jn. 11:51; to intend, Lk. 10:1; participle μέλλων, μέλλουσα, μέλλον, future as distinguished from past and present, Mt. 12:32; Lk. 13:9; to be always, as it were, about to do, to delay, linger, Acts 22:16

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μέλλω to think of doing, intend to do, to be about to do, with inf., mostly inf. fut., τάχ᾽ ἔμελλε δώσειν he was just going to give, Il.; μέλλεις ἀφαιρήσεσθαι ἄεθλον thou thinkest to strip me of the prize, id. Il.; often with οὐκ ἄρα, as, οὐκ ἄρ᾽ ἔμελλες λήξειν; did you not think you might stop? could you not stop? Od., etc.; to be about to do (on compulsion), to be destined to do or to be, τὰ οὐ τελέεσθαι ἔμελλον which were not to be accomplished, Il.; μέλλεν οἶκος ἀφνειὸς ἔμμεναι the house was destined to be wealthy, Od.; εἰ ἐμέλλομεν ἀνοίσειν if we were able to refer, Plat.

to express a certainty, μέλλω ἀπέχθεσθαι Διί it must be that I am hated by Zeus, Il.; μέλλω ἀθανάτους ἀλιτέσθαι I must have sinned against the immortals…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-GSM — Verb · present · active · participle · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-GSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
21%being about
being about21% · 23×about20% · 22×coming12% · 13×he was about5% · 5×you are about4% · 4×soon3% · 3×other renderings26% · 29×other renderings11% · 12×

111 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 40 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb94%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 110 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςαὐτόςἀπό
ὅς
αὐτόςπνεῦμαwind, breath, spἐν
τίςIrg
οἶδαI know, rememberοὗτοςνῦνnow, already, at
σύ
λέγωI say, speakτύπτωI beat, strike, ἐπί
ἐγώ
ὅςὅτιthat, since, becψυχήthe soul, life,
μέλλωcoming [One].110×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenβασιλείαkingship, sovereπρόσωπονthe face, counte
αὐτός
συμβαίνωI happen, occurἔρχομαιI come, goπαραδίδωμιI hand over, del
γίνομαιI come into being, a
καίand, even, also,παρακαλέωI summon, entreaμετά
ἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am about
εἰCondοὐNeg
γάρfor
ἩρῴδηςHerodArticle theἀποθνῄσκωI am dying, am a

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμέλλω · 110× in the New Testament
Acts Revelation John Luke Matthew Hebrews Romans 1 Timothy 2 Peter Mark 1 Corinthians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 14c. AD 40

ἔδει γὰρ τὸν κόσμον τελειότατον μὲν ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων κατ’ ἀριθμὸν τέλειον παγῆναι τὸν ἕξ, ἐν ἑαυτῷ δ’ ἔχειν μέλλοντα τὰς ἐκ συνδυασμοῦ γενέσεις πρὸς μικτὸν ἀριθμὸν τὸν πρῶτον ἀρτιοπέριττον τυπωθῆναι, περιέξοντα καὶ τὴν τοῦ σπείροντος ἄρρενος καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.5c. AD 75–95

μέλλει γὰρ περιέξειν ἅπασαν τὴν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχαιολογίαν καὶ διάταξιν τοῦ πολιτεύματος ἐκ τῶν Ἑβραϊκῶν μεθηρμηνευμένην γραμμάτων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59496Krokodilopolis (Arsinoites)249 BC–242 BC

Νικαίαν ἀποδημῆσαι πρὸς σέ, ὅπως ἂν αὐτῶι δῶις ἐπιστολὴν πρὸς Ἑρμάφιλον· λέγουσιν γὰρ αὐτὸν μέλλειν ἐγδημεῖν εἰς Μέμφιν. ἔρρωσο.

ÉdP 5 (1939), p. 87-Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 297

τὴν τῆς ἡμῶν μητρὸς τελευτὴν συνελθὼν ἑτέρᾳ γυναικί, τολμηθεὶς λυπρὸν χρόνον ἔμεινεν. τούτου δὲ μέλλοντος τὸν βίον μεταλλάσσειν μετεκαλεσάμεθα τὴν προειρημένην αὐτοῦ γυναῖκα καὶ ταύτης ἐπυθόμεθα μήπως τι χρεωστῇ

ον τῆς κώμης, ὁμοίως δὲ τὸν Ἰσίδωρον ἀναδέξασθαι καὶ ἀποπληρῶσαι ἀόκνως εἰς τὴν μέλλει ὁ Πτολεμαῖος αἱρεθῆναι ἢ προσαγγελῆναι λειτουργίαν. ὁπότερον δὲ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔξεστι ἀλλάξαι τὸν ἕτερον

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate